Container Refrigeration

OPERATIONS AND SERVICE

MANUAL
For

69NT40-561-300 to 399
Container Refrigeration Units

T-365 Rev C
OPERATIONS AND SERVICE
MANUAL
For

69NT40-561-300 to 399

© Carrier Corporation, 2017 Printed in U. S. A. May 2017

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 FIRST AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.5 SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.1 Control Box ............................................................. 2–1
2.3.2 Temperature Readout ..................................................... 2–1
2.3.3 Pressure Readout ........................................................ 2–1
2.3.4 Compressor ............................................................. 2–1
2.3.5 Condenser Coil .......................................................... 2–1
2.3.6 Condenser Fan Operation .................................................. 2–1
2.3.7 Evaporator .............................................................. 2–1
2.3.8 Evaporator Fan Operation .................................................. 2–1
2.3.9 Plate Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.1 Battery ................................................................. 2–2
2.4.2 Dehumidification ......................................................... 2–2
2.4.3 USDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.4 Interrogator ............................................................. 2–2
2.4.5 Remote Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.6 Quest - CCPC ........................................................... 2–2
2.4.7 Communications Interface Module ........................................... 2–2
2.4.8 Autotransformer .......................................................... 2–2
2.4.9 Gutters ................................................................. 2–2
2.4.10 Handles ................................................................ 2–2
2.4.11 Thermometer Port ........................................................ 2–2
2.4.12 Back Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.13 460 Volt Cable ........................................................... 2–3
2.4.14 230 Volt Cable ........................................................... 2–3
2.4.15 Cable Restraint .......................................................... 2–3
2.4.16 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) .............................................. 2–3
2.4.17 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) .............................................. 2–3
2.4.18 Labels ................................................................. 2–3
2.4.19 Controller ............................................................... 2–3
2.4.20 Condenser Grille ......................................................... 2–3
2.4.21 eAutoFresh ............................................................. 2–3
2.4.22 XtendFRESH ............................................................ 2–3
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section ............................................ 3–1

i T-365
 3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.3 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.1.6 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.1.7 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.5.1 Standard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.5.2 Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.5.3 Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.1 Key Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.1.2 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.1.3 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3 CONTROLLER SEQUENCE AND MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.1 Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.2 Start Up - Compressor Bump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.3 Perishable Mode Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.4 Perishable Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.5 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.6 Perishable Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.7 Perishable Pulldown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.10 Perishable Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.14 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.15 Frozen Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.3.20 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.21 Defrost Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.22 Defrost Related Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.4 PROTECTION MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.2 Failure Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.3 Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14

T-365 ii
 4.4.4 Compressor High Temperature Protection .................................... 4–14
4.4.5 Compressor Low Pressure Protection ........................................ 4–14
4.4.6 Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regulation ................................ 4–15
4.4.7 Condenser Fan Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.5 QUEST - CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.6 CONTROLLER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.7 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8 DATACORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8.2 DataCORDER Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.4 Logging Interval (dCF03) .................................................. 4–19
4.8.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04) ................................................ 4–19
4.8.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) ........................................... 4–21
4.8.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10) ........................................ 4–21
4.8.8 DataCORDER Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
4.8.9 Pre-Trip Data Recording .................................................. 4–22
4.8.10 DataCORDER Communications ............................................ 4–22
4.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment .................................................... 4–22
4.8.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure ........................................... 4–23
4.8.13 DataCORDER Alarms .................................................... 4–23
4.8.14 ISO Trip Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
4.9 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
4.10 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
4.11 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39
4.12 CONTROLLER PRE-TRIP TEST CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 INSPECTION (BEFORE LOADING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 CONNECT POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power .......................................... 5–1
5.2.2 Connection To 190/230 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent ............................................... 5–2
5.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent ............................................... 5–3
5.3.3 Vent Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.4 EAUTOFRESH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.4.1 eAutoFresh Pre−Trip Inspection ............................................. 5–4
5.4.2 eAutoFresh Start−Up Procedure ............................................. 5–4
5.4.3 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.5 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.6 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.6.1 Starting the Unit .......................................................... 5–7
5.6.2 Stopping the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.7 START−UP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.7.1 Physical Inspection ....................................................... 5–7
5.7.2 Check Controller Function Codes ............................................ 5–7
5.7.3 Start Temperature Recorder DataCORDER .................................... 5–7
5.7.4 Complete Inspection ...................................................... 5–7

iii T-365
 5.8 PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.9 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.11 EAUTOFRESH NOT OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6.13 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6.14 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.15 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.16 ABNORMAL CURRENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
SERVICE ............................................................................. 7–1
7.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.4 PUMP DOWN THE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.3 Complete System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.6.4 Partial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.8 COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.9 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.9.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.10 CONDENSER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.10.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.10.2 Condenser Coil Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.10.3 Condenser Coil Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.10.4 Condenser Coil Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.11 CONDENSER FAN AND FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.11.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.12 FILTER DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.13 EVAPORATOR COIL & HEATER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.13.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16

T-365 iv
 7.13.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.14 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.14.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.14.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly ................................... 7–18
7.14.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.15 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.16 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.16.1 Replacing Electronic Expansion Valve and Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.17 ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.18 ECONOMIZER EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.18.1 Economizer Expansion Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.19 TROUBLESHOOTING P6-7 (DLV/DUV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.19.1 Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) .............................................. 7–23
7.19.2 Digital Loader Valve and Unloader Valve (DLV/DUV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.20 DIGITAL LOADER VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.20.1 Digital Loader Valve Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.20.2 Digital Loader Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.21 DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.21.1 Digital Unloader Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.22 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.23 AUTOTRANSFORMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.24 CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.24.1 Handling Modules ....................................................... 7–29
7.24.2 Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.24.3 Controller Programming Procedure .......................................... 7–30
7.24.4 Programming Procedure for Software Versions 5354 & Greater With Updated Menu Option
(menu0115.ml) 7–31
7.24.5 Removing and Installing a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.24.6 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.25 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.25.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure ............................................... 7–34
7.25.2 Sensor Replacement ..................................................... 7–37
7.25.3 Sensors STS and SRS Re-Installation ....................................... 7–38
7.25.4 Sensors RRS and RTS Re-Installation ....................................... 7–39
7.25.5 Sensor DTS Re-Installation ................................................ 7–39
7.25.6 Sensors ETS1 and ETS2 Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
7.25.7 Sensor, CPDS Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
7.26 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
7.27 EAUTOFRESH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.27.1 Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter .......................................... 7–41
7.27.2 Checking eAutoFresh Drive System ......................................... 7–41
7.27.3 Checking the Controller ................................................... 7–42
7.27.4 Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.28 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.29 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDEX–1

v T-365
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section ................................................. 3–1

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section ............................................................ 3–2
Figure 3.3 Compressor Section ........................................................... 3–3
Figure 3.4 Air-Cooled Condenser Section ................................................... 3–4
Figure 3.5 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Figure 3.6 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Standard Operation ................................ 3–10
Figure 3.7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System .................................................... 4–1
Figure 4.2 Key Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Figure 4.3 Display Module ............................................................... 4–3
Figure 4.4 Control Module ............................................................... 4–4
Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode ............................................ 4–6
Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling ....................................................... 4–8
Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating ....................................................... 4–9
Figure 4.8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode .............................................. 4–10
Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode ................................................................ 4–11
Figure 4.10 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Download Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
Figure 4.12 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–38
Figure 5.1 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
Figure 5.2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart .............................................. 5–3
Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
Figure 7.2 Manifold Gauge/Hose Set ....................................................... 7–2
Figure 7.3 Service Valve ................................................................ 7–3
Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
Figure 7.5 Compressor Kit ............................................................... 7–9
Figure 7.6 Compressor Ports/Connections ................................................. 7–10
Figure 7.7 Lubricating Orange Gasket ..................................................... 7–10
Figure 7.8 Installing Orange Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
Figure 7.9 Power Plug Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
Figure 7.10 Power Plug Secured ......................................................... 7–11
Figure 7.11 High Pressure Switch Testing .................................................. 7–12
Figure 7.12 Condenser Fan Position ...................................................... 7–15
Figure 7.13 Heater Arrangement ......................................................... 7–17
Figure 7.14 Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
Figure 7.15 Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
Figure 7.16 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) .................................... 7–21
Figure 7.17 Economizer Expansion Valve .................................................. 7–22
Figure 7.18 DLV Installation ............................................................. 7–25
Figure 7.19 DUV Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
Figure 7.20 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
Figure 7.21 Controller Section of the Control Box ............................................ 7–30

vii T-365
Figure 7.22 Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
Figure 7.23 Sensor and Cable Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
Figure 7.24 Supply Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
Figure 7.25 Return Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.26 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.27 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
Figure 7.28 Stepper Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
Figure 7.29 Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
Figure 7.30 Motor Cup Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
Figure 7.31 Communications Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
Figure 8.1 Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
Figure 8.2 Unit Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
Figure 8.3 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Figure 8.4 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4

T-365 viii
 LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page

Table 3–1 Refrigeration System Data ...................................................... 3–6

Table 3–2 Safety and Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
Table 4–1 Key Pad Description ........................................................... 4–2
Table 4–2 Controller Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
Table 4–4 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes .................................................. 4–53
Table 4–5 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments ........................................ 4–61
Table 4–6 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records ........................................... 4–61
Table 4–7 DataCORDER Alarms ......................................................... 4–63
Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays ................................................. 7–28
Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance ........................................................... 7–35
Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance (CPDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
Table 7–4 R-134a Temperature - Pressure Chart ............................................ 7–45
Table 7–5 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel) . . . . . . . . . . 7–46

ix T-365
 SECTION 1
SAFETY SUMMARY
1.1 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES
Installation and servicing of refrigeration equipment can be hazardous due to system pressures and electrical com-
ponents. Only trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or service refrigeration equipment.
When working on refrigeration equipment, observe all potential Danger, Warning and Caution hazards, including
those shown below and on hazard labels attached to the unit.
The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in this man-
ual. They are recommended precautions that must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance
of the equipment covered herein. The general safety notices are presented in the following three sections labeled:
First Aid, Operating Precautions and Maintenance Precautions. A listing of the specific warnings and cautions
appearing elsewhere in the manual follows the general safety notices.

1.2 FIRST AID

An injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.

1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

Always wear safety glasses.
Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of the evaporator and condenser fans.
Wear appropriate personal protective equipment for the work being undertaken.
No work should be performed on the unit until all circuit breakers and start-stop switches are turned off, and power
supply is disconnected.
In case of severe vibration or unusual noise, stop the unit and investigate.

1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. Do not remove the condenser fan grille or
evaporator access panels before turning power off, disconnecting and securing the power plug.
Be sure power is turned off before working on motors, controllers, solenoid valves and electrical control switches.
Tag circuit breaker and power supply to prevent accidental energizing of circuit.
Do not bypass any electrical safety devices, e.g. bridging an overload, or using any sort of jumper wires. Problems
with the system should be diagnosed, and any necessary repairs performed by qualified service personnel.
When performing any arc welding on the unit or container, disconnect all wire harness connectors from the mod-
ules in control boxes. Do not remove wire harness from the modules unless you are grounded to the unit frame
with a static safe wrist strap.
In case of electrical fire, open circuit switch and extinguish with CO2 (never use water).

1.5 SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS

To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation is
given with the appropriate consequences:

! DANGER
Means an immediate hazard that WILL result in severe personal injury or death.

! WARNING
Means to warn against hazards or unsafe conditions that COULD result in severe personal
injury or death.

1–1 T-365
 ! CAUTION
Means to warn against potential hazard or unsafe practice that could result in personal injury,
product or property damage.

The statements listed below are applicable to the refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this manual. These
recommended precautions must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of the equipment
covered herein.

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge Only With R−134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI
Standard 700 specification.

! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compressor unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.

! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF start-stop switch (ST), unit circuit
breaker(s) and external power source.

! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.

! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) (CB-1 & CB-2) and the START-STOP switch (ST) are in
the “O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.

! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the com-
pressor.

! WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor, be sure to relieve the internal pressure very carefully
by slightly loosening the couplings to break the seal.

! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.

! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting power plug.

T-365 1–2
 ! WARNING
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT PUT
WATER INTO THE ACID - this will cause spattering and excessive heat.

! WARNING
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution from the skin immediately if accidental contact
occurs. Do not allow the solution to splash onto concrete.

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

! WARNING
Installation requires wiring to the main unit circuit breaker, CB1. Make sure the power to the
unit is off and power plug disconnected before beginning installation.

! CAUTION
Charge water-cooled condenser or receiver according to nameplate specifications to ensure
optimal unit performance.

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from controller modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all controller module wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any
part of the container.

! CAUTION
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physically
different and will result in damage to the controller.

! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated.
At the completion of Pre-Trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reac-
tivated.

! CAUTION
When condenser water flow is below 11 lpm (3 gpm) or when water-cooled operation is not in
use, the CFS switch MUST be set to position “1” or the unit will not operate properly.

1–3 T-365
 ! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting oper-
ator intervention.

! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip test Auto 2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key!

! CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate in reverse for more than two minutes will result in
internal compressor damage. Turn the start-stop switch OFF immediately.

! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set be sure set is brought to suc-
tion pressure before disconnecting.

! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or dis-
charge service valves closed (front-seated). Internal damage will result from operating the
compressor in a deep vacuum.

! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.

! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.

! CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid nicking or cutting wires.

! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance.

T-365 1–4
 SECTION 2
INTRODUCTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The Carrier Transicold model 69NT40-561-300 through 399 series units are of lightweight aluminum frame con-
struction, designed to fit in the front of a container and serve as the container’s front wall.
They are one piece, self-contained, all electric units, which include cooling and heating systems to provide precise
temperature control.
The units are supplied with a complete charge of refrigerant R-134a and compressor lubricating oil, and are ready
for operation upon installation. Forklift pockets are provided for unit installation and removal.
The base unit operates on nominal 380/460 volt, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz (Hz) power. An optional autotransformer
may be fitted to allow operation on nominal 190/230, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz power. Control system power is provided
by a transformer which steps the supply power down to 18 and 24 volts, single phase.
The controller is a Carrier Transicold Micro-Link 3 microprocessor. The controller operates automatically to select
cooling, holding or heating as required to maintain the desired set point temperature within very close limits.
The controller has a keypad and display for viewing or changing operating parameters. The display is also
equipped with lights to indicate various modes of operation.

2.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION

Unit identification information is provided on a plate located on the back wall of the condenser section. The plate
provides the unit model number, the unit serial number and the unit parts identification number (PID). The model
number identifies the overall unit configuration, while the PID number provides information on specific optional
equipment, factory provisioned to allow for field installation of optional equipment and differences in detailed parts.

2.3 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS

2.3.1 Control Box

Units are equipped with an aluminum control box, and may be fitted with a lockable door.

2.3.2 Temperature Readout

The unit is fitted with suction and discharge refrigerant temperature sensors. The sensor readings may be viewed
on the controller display.

2.3.3 Pressure Readout

The unit is fitted with evaporator, suction, and discharge pressure transducers. The transducer readings may be
viewed on the controller display.

2.3.4 Compressor
The unit is fitted with a scroll compressor equipped with suction and discharge service connections.

2.3.5 Condenser Coil

The unit is fitted with a two-row square formed condenser coil using 7mm tubing.

2.3.6 Condenser Fan Operation

Units are equipped with a three phase, dual speed condenser fan motor. Opening of condenser fan motor internal
protector will stop the fan motor and the controller will subsequently shut down the compressor.

2.3.7 Evaporator
The evaporator section is equipped with an electronic expansion valve (EEV).

2.3.8 Evaporator Fan Operation

Units are equipped with three-phase evaporator fan motors. Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will
shut down the unit.

2–1 T-365
2.3.9 Plate Set
Each unit is equipped with a tethered set of wiring schematics and wiring diagram plates. The plate sets are
ordered using a seven-digit base part number and a two-digit dash number.

2.4 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS

Various options may be factory or field equipped to the base unit. These options are described in the following sub-
paragraphs.

2.4.1 Battery
The refrigeration controller may be fitted with standard replaceable batteries or a rechargeable battery pack.
Rechargeable battery packs may be fitted in the standard location or in a secure location.

2.4.2 Dehumidification
The unit may be fitted with a humidity sensor. This sensor allows setting of a humidity set point in the controller. In
dehumidification mode, the controller will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.

2.4.3 USDA
The unit may be supplied with fittings for additional temperature probes, which allow recording of USDA Cold
Treatment data by the integral DataCORDER function of the Micro-Link refrigeration controller.

2.4.4 Interrogator
Units that use the DataCORDER function are fitted with interrogator receptacles for connection of equipment to
download the recorded data. Two receptacles may be fitted; one is accessible from the front of the container and
the other is mounted inside the container (with the USDA receptacles).

2.4.5 Remote Monitoring

The unit may be fitted with a remote monitoring receptacle. This item allows connection of remote indicators for
COOL, DEFROST and IN RANGE. Unless otherwise indicated, the receptacle is mounted at the control box loca-
tion.

2.4.6 Quest - CCPC

Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a method of temperature control used during steady-state perish-
able cooling that cycles the compressor on and off according to supply / return air temperature conditions.

2.4.7 Communications Interface Module

The unit may be fitted with a communications interface module. The communications interface module is a slave
module which allows communication with a master central monitoring station. The module will respond to commu-
nication and return information over the main power line. Refer to the ship master system technical manual for fur-
ther information.

2.4.8 Autotransformer
An autotransformer may be provided to allow operation on 190/230, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz power. The autotrans-
former raises the supply voltage to the nominal 380/460 volt power required by the base unit. The autotransformer
may also be fitted with an individual circuit breaker for the 230 volt power.
If the unit is equipped with an autotransformer and communications module, the autotransformer will be fitted with
a transformer bridge unit (TBU) to assist in communications.

2.4.9 Gutters
Rain gutters may be fitted over the control box to divert rain away from the controls.

2.4.10 Handles
The unit may be equipped with handles to facilitate access to stacked containers. These fixed handles are located
on either side of the unit.

2.4.11 Thermometer Port

The unit may be fitted with ports in the front of the frame for insertion of a thermometer to measure supply and/or
return air temperature. If fitted, the port(s) will require a cap and chain.

T-365 2–2
2.4.12 Back Panels
Aluminum back panels may have access doors and/or hinge mounting.

2.4.13 460 Volt Cable

Various power cable and plug designs are available for the main 460 volt supply. The plug options tailor the cables
to each customer’s requirements.

2.4.14 230 Volt Cable

Units equipped with an autotransformer require an additional power cable for connection to the 230 volt source.
Various power cable and plug designs are available. The plug options tailor the cables to each customer’s require-
ments.

2.4.15 Cable Restraint

Various designs are available for storage of the power cables. These options are variations of the compressor sec-
tion cable guard.

2.4.16 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up)

The unit may be fitted with an upper fresh air makeup assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available with a
vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.

2.4.17 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up)

The unit may be fitted with a lower fresh air makeup assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available with a
vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.

2.4.18 Labels
Safety Instruction and Function Code listing labels differ depending on the options installed. Labels available with
additional languages are listed in the parts list.

2.4.19 Controller
Two replacement controllers are available:

1. Re-manufactured - Controller is the equivalent of a new OEM controller and is supplied with a 12-month warranty.

2. Repaired - Controller has had previous faults repaired and upgraded with the latest software.

NOTICE
Repaired controllers are NOT to be used for warranty repairs; only full OEM Re-manufactured
controllers are to be used.

Controllers will be factory-equipped with the latest version of operational software, but will NOT be configured for a
specific model number and will need to be configured at the time of installation or sale.

2.4.20 Condenser Grille

Condenser grilles are direct bolted.

2.4.21 eAutoFresh
The optional eAutoFresh venting system moderates the atmospheric level inside the container unit in response to
cargo respiration.

2.4.22 XtendFRESH
Unit may be modified for XtendFRESH atmosphere device. Refer to the T366 XtendFRESH manual for more infor-
mation.

2–3 T-365
 SECTION 3
DESCRIPTION
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section

The unit is designed so that the majority of the components are accessible from the front (see Figure 3.1). The unit
model number, serial number and parts identification number can be found on the serial plate on the back wall of
the condenser section.

3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent

The function of the upper or lower makeup air vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air
circulation. A manually operated venting system is located in the upper left access panel.
The optional eAutoFresh vent system is used to moderate the atmospheric level in the container in response to
cargo respiration. When transporting frozen cargo loads the vent will be closed. The upper left access panel con-
tains the vent slide and motor assembly. It may be removed to allow entry into the evaporator section where the
CO2 sensor and drive pack are located.

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section

2
15

* Unit may be modi- 5

fied for Xtend-
FRESH atmosphere
device. Refer to the
T366 XtendFRESH
manual for more in-
formation 6
14

13 7

12 11 10 9

1. Access Panel (Evap. Fan #1) 9. Supply Temperature Supply/Recorder Sensor

2. Fork Lift Pockets Assembly (STS/SRS)
3. Control Box 10. Economizer
4. Unit Display 11. Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
5. Key Pad 12. Power Cables and Plug (Location)
6. Remote Monitoring Receptacle 13. Autotransformer
7. Start-Stop Switch, ST 14. Condenser Grille
8. Compressor 15. Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent Panel (Evap.
Fan #2)
-----

3–1 T-365
3.1.3 Evaporator Section
The evaporator section is shown below. The evaporator fans circulate air through the container by pulling it in the
top of the unit, directing it through the evaporator coil where it is heated or cooled, and discharging it at the bottom.
If the unit is provisioned for XtendFRESH or equipped with eAutoFresh, system components are mounted in addi-
tion to the standard refrigeration unit components. The stepper motor component is installed in the vent; the air fil-
ter, CO2 sensor, stepper motor drive and CO2 sensing lines are installed on the rib of the upper grill.
Most evaporator components are accessible by removing the upper rear panel (as shown in the illustration) or by
removing the evaporator fan access panels (see Figure 3.2).

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section

8
6 4
3
2
1

13

12

11 5

10

1. Evaporator Fan Motor #1 (EM1) 8. Evaporator Temperature Sensors (Location)

2. Return Recorder Sensor/Temperature Sensor (ETS1 & ETS2)
(RRS/RTS) 9. Interrogator Connector (Rear) (ICR)
3. Humidity Sensor (HS) 10. USDA Probe Receptacle PR2
4. Evaporator Fan Motor #2 (EM2) 11. USDA Probe Receptacle PR1
5. Evaporator Coil Heaters (Underside of Coil) 12. USDA Probe Receptacle PR3
6. Evaporator Coil 13. Cargo Probe Receptacle PR4
7. Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
-----

T-365 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor Section
The compressor section includes the compressor, digital loader valve (DLV), digital unloader valve (DUV), high
pressure switch (HPS), discharge pressure transducer (DPT), evaporator pressure transducer (EPT) and the suc-
tion pressure transducer (SPT).
The supply temperature sensor and supply recorder sensor are located to the left of the compressor.

Figure 3.3 Compressor Section

10
18 11
12

13 17

14 9

15
3
2 4
5

16
1

1. Compressor 10. Digital Loader Valve (DLV)

2. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 11. Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
(CPDS) (Location) 12. Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
3. Discharge Connection 13. High Pressure Switch (HPS)
4. Suction Connection (Location) 14. Discharge Service Valve
5. Compressor Terminal Box 15. Suction Service Valve
6. Oil Drain (Location) 16. Supply Temperature/Supply Recorder Sensor
7. Economizer Connection Assembly (STS/SRS)
8. Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 17. Warning Label
9. DUV/DLV Connection 18. Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
-----

3–3 T-365
3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section
The air-cooled condenser section consists of the condenser fan, condenser coil, receiver, liquid line service valve,
filter drier, fusible plug, economizer, economizer expansion valve, economizer solenoid valve (ESV), and sight
glass/moisture indicator.
The condenser fan pulls air from around the coil and discharges it horizontally through the condenser fan grille.

Figure 3.4 Air-Cooled Condenser Section

6 7 8

9
5
4

10

11

12

Two
locations
14

13

1. Grille and Venturi Assembly 8. Filter Drier

2. Condenser Fan 9. Economizer
3. Condenser Coil Cover 10. Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
4. Condenser Coil 11. Economizer Expansion Valve
5. Condenser Fan Motor 12. Warning Label (location)
6. Receiver 13. Service Access Valve
7. Sight Glass 14. Liquid Level/Moisture Indicator
-----

T-365 3–4
3.1.6 Control Box Section
The control box (Figure 3.5) includes: the manual operation switches, circuit breaker (CB-1), compressor, fan and
heater contactors, control power transformer, fuses, key pad, display module, current sensor module, controller
module and the communications interface module.

3.1.7 Communications Interface Module

The communications interface module is a slave module which allows communication between the refrigeration
unit and a ship system master central monitoring station. The module will respond to communication and return
information over the ships main power line. Refer to the master system technical manual for further information.

Figure 3.5 Control Box Section

1 2 3 4

16

15

14

13 12 11 10 9 8

1. Compressor Contactor - CH 9. Control Transformer

2. Compressor Phase A Contactor - PA 10. High Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor - EF
3. Compressor Phase B Contactor - PB 11. Low Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor - ES
4. Heater Contactor - HR 12. Condenser Fan Contactor - CF
5. Controller/DataCORDER Module (Controller) 13. Circuit Breaker - 460V
6. Remote Monitoring Receptacle 14. Current Sensor Module
7. Start-Stop Switch, ST 15. Condenser Fan Low Speed - LC
8. Controller Battery Pack (Standard Location) 16. Condenser Fan (High Speed Shorting) - FS
-----

3–5 T-365
3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA

Table 3–1 Refrigeration System Data

Model Number ZMD26K2E-TFD-274
Weight (With Oil) 42.9 kg (95 lb)
Compressor/Motor Assembly
Approved Oil Uniqema Emkarate RL-32-3MAF
Oil Charge 1774 ml (60 ounces)
Verify at -18°C (0°F)
Electronic Expansion Valve
container box tempera- 4.4 to 6.7°C (8 to 12°F)
Superheat (Evaporator)
ture
Verify at -18°C (0°F)
High Pressure Expansion Valve
container box tempera- 4.4 to 11.1°C (8 to 20°F)
(HPXV)
ture

Heater Termination Thermostat Opens 54° (+/- 3) C = 130° (+/- 5) F

(HTT) Closes 38° (+/- 4) C = 100° (+/- 7) F
Cut-Out (+/- 1.0) kg/cm2 = 350 (+/- 10) psig
High Pressure Switch (HPS)
Cut-In (+/- 0.7) kg/cm2 = 250 (+/- 10) psig

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage.
Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the product.
Charge Only With R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.
Conforming to AHRI standard 700 specifica-
Refrigerant R-134a
tions.

! CAUTION
Charge water-cooled condenser or receiver according to nameplate specifications to ensure
optimal unit performance.

Refrigerant Charge Receiver 4.54kg (10 lbs)

Melting Point 99°C = (210°F)

Fusible Plug
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft-lbs)
Bursts at 35 +/- 5% kg/cm2 = (500 +/- 5% psig)
Rupture Disc
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft-lbs)
Unit Weight Refer to unit model number plate.
Cut-In 0.5 +/- 0.2 kg/cm2 (7 +/- 3 psig)
Water Pressure Switch
Cutout 1.6 +/- 0.4 kg/cm2 (22 +/- 5 psig)

T-365 3–6
3.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DATA

CB-1 (25 amp) Trips at 29 amps

Circuit Breaker CB-2 (50 amp) Trips at 62.5 amps
CB-3 (70 amp) Trips at 87.5 amps
Compressor Motor Full Load Amps (FLA) 13 amps @ 460 VAC
380 VAC/3 PH/50 Hz 460 VAC/3 PH/60 Hz
Full Load Amps, High
0.73 0.80
Speed
Full Load Amps, Low Speed .42 .44

Condenser Fan Motor RPM, High Speed 1425 rpm 1725 rpm
RPM, Low Speed 720 rpm 850 rpm
Voltage and Frequency 360 - 460 VAC +/-2.5Hz 400 - 506 VAC +/-2.5Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required.
Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end.
Number of Heaters 6
Rating 750 watts +5/-10% each @ 230 VAC
Evaporator Coil Heaters
Resistance (cold) 6.8 to 77.2 ohms @ 20°C (68°F)
Type Sheath
380 VAC/3 PH/50 Hz 460 VAC/3 PH/60 Hz
Full Load Amps
1.07 0.9
High Speed
Full Load Amps
0.47 0.47
Low Speed
Rotations Per Minute
Evaporator Fan Motors 2850 rpm 3450 rpm
High Speed
Rotations Per Minute
1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Low Speed
Voltage and Frequency 360 - 460 VAC +/- 1.25Hz 400 - 500 VAC +/- 1.5Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end
Control Circuit 7.5 amps (F3A,F3B)
Fuses Controller/DataCORDER 5 amps (F1 & F2)
Emergency Bypass 10 amps (FEB)
Electrical Output 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over 90 degree range
Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Supply Voltage 5 VDC +/- 10%
Supply Current 5 mA (typical)
Nominal Resistance @
Solenoid Valve Coils (ESV/ 77°F (25°C) 7.7 ohms +/- 5%
USV) 24 VAC
Maximum Current Draw 0.7 amps
DLV Coil 12 VDC Nominal Resistance @
14.8 ohms +/- 5%
68°F (20°C)

3–7 T-365
DUV Coil 24VAC Nominal Resistance @
15.5 ohms +/- 5%
68°F (20°C)
Coil Feed to Ground (Gray
47 ohms
EEV Nominal Resistance Wire)
Coil Feed to Coil Feed 95 ohms
Orange wire Power
Red wire Output
Brown wire Ground
Input voltage 5 VDC
Output voltage 0 to 3.3 VDC
Humidity Sensor
Output voltage readings verses relative humidity (RH) percentage:
30% 0.99 V
50% 1.65 V
70% 2.31 V
90% 2.97 V

3.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Unit components are protected from damage by safety and protective devices listed in Table 3–1. These devices
monitor the unit operating conditions and open a set of electrical contacts when an unsafe condition occurs.
Open safety switch contacts on either or both of devices IP-CP or HPS will shut down the compressor.
Open safety switch contacts on device IP-CM will shut down the condenser fan motor.
The entire refrigeration unit will shut down if one of the following safety devices open: (a) circuit breaker(s); (b) fuse
(F3A/F3B, 7.5A); or (c) evaporator fan motor internal protector(s) - (IP).

Table 3–2 Safety and Protective Devices

UNSAFE CONDITION DEVICE DEVICE SETTING
Circuit Breaker (CB-1, 25 amp) -
Trips at 29 amps (460 VAC)
Manual Reset
Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 50 amp) -
Excessive current draw Trips at 62.5 amps (230 VAC)
Manual Reset
Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 70 amp) -
Trips at 87.5 amps (230 VAC)
Manual Reset
Excessive current draw in the control
Fuse (F3A & F3B) 7.5 amp rating
circuit
Excessive current draw by the con-
Fuse (F1 & F2) 5 amp rating
troller Fuse
Excessive current draw by the Emer-
Fuse (FEB) 10 amp rating
gency Bypass module
Excessive condenser fan motor Internal Protector (IP-CM) - Automat-
N/A
winding temperature ic Reset
Excessive compressor motor wind- Internal Protector (IP-CP) - Automat-
N/A
ing temperature ic Reset
Excessive evaporator fan motor(s) Internal Protector(s) (IP-EM) - Auto-
N/A
winding temperature matic Reset

T-365 3–8
 Table 3–2 Safety and Protective Devices (Continued)
UNSAFE CONDITION DEVICE DEVICE SETTING
Fusible Plug - Used on the Receiver 99°C = (210°F)
Abnormal pressures/temperatures in
the high refrigerant side Rupture Disc - Used on the Water-
35 kg/cm2 = (500 psig)
Cooled Condenser
Abnormally high discharge pressure High Pressure Switch (HPS) Opens at 25 kg/cm2 (350 psig)

3.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT

3.5.1 Standard Operation

Starting at the compressor, (see Figure 3.6, upper schematic) the suction gas is compressed to a higher pressure
and temperature.
The refrigerant gas flows through the discharge line and continues into the air-cooled condenser. When operating
with the air-cooled condenser active, air flowing across the coil fins and tubes cools the gas to saturation tempera-
ture. By removing latent heat, the gas condenses to a high pressure/high temperature liquid and flows to the
receiver, which stores the additional charge necessary for low temperature operation.
The liquid refrigerant continues through the liquid line, the filter drier (which keeps refrigerant clean and dry) and
the economizer (not active during standard operation) to the electronic expansion valve (EEV).
As the liquid refrigerant passes through the variable orifice of the EEV, the pressure drops to suction pressure. In
this process some of the liquid vaporizes to a gas (flash gas), removing heat from the remaining liquid. The liquid
exits as a low pressure, low temperature, saturated mix. Heat is then absorbed from the return air by the balance of
the liquid, causing it to vaporize in the evaporator coil. The vapor then flows through the suction tube back to the
compressor.
During the standard mode of operation, the normally closed valves, digital loader valve (DLV) and digital unloader
valve (DUV), control the system refrigerant flow and capacity by loading and unloading the compressor in frequent
discrete time intervals. The DLV and DUV operate in opposition to each other such that when the DLV is closed the
DUV is open and vice versa. The valves cycle on a fixed duty cycle so that maximum capacity occurs when the
DLV is open 100% of the time and the DUV is open 0% and minimum capacity is when the DLV is open 0% of the
time and the DUV 100% of the time. If the system capacity has been decreased to the lowest allowable capacity,
the unit will enter a trim heat mode of operation, during which the controller will pulse the evaporator heaters in
sequence with the compressor digital signal in order to absorb the excess capacity.

3.5.2 Economized Operation

In the economized mode, (see Figure 3.7) the frozen and pull down capacity of the unit is increased by sub- cool-
ing the liquid refrigerant entering the electronic expansion valve. Overall efficiency is increased because the gas
leaving the economizer enters the compressor at a higher pressure, therefore requiring less energy to compress it
to the required condensing conditions.
Liquid refrigerant for use in the economizer circuit is taken from the main liquid line as it leaves the filter drier. The
flow is activated when the controller energizes the economizer solenoid valve (ESV).
The liquid refrigerant flows through the ESV to the economizer expansion valve internal passages, absorbing heat
from the liquid refrigerant flowing to the electronic expansion valve. The resultant “medium” temperature/pressure
gas enters the compressor at the economizer port fitting.

3.5.3 Economizer Expansion Valve

The microprocessor controls the superheat leaving the economizer expansion valve (EXV). From the EXV the
refrigerant flows through the internal passages of the economizer heat exchanger, absorbing heat from the refriger-
ant flowing to the EEV. The resultant “medium” temperature/pressure gas enters the compressor at the economizer
port fitting.

3–9 T-365
 Figure 3.6 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Standard Operation

STANDARD OPERATION

COMBO
ETS1 AND 2
EVAPORATOR

ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION
VALVE

SIGHT
GLASS

CONDENSER
FILTER
DRIER

DISCHARGE
SERVICE
VALVE

LIQUID LEVEL/
MOISTURE DISCHARGE
INDICATOR LIQUID LINE TEMPERATURE
RECEIVER SERVICE VALVE SENSOR

DIGITAL
DIGITAL UNLOADER
VALVE
ECON. TXV LOADER
ECONOMIZER SENSING BULB VALVE
SOLENOID
VALVE

DISCHARGE
PRESSURE
ECONOMIZER TRANSDUCER
TXV

ECONOMIZER EVAPORATOR PRESSURE

TRANSDUCER

SUCTION PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER

SUCTION
SERVICE
VALVE
COMPRESSOR

T-365 3–10
 Figure 3.7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Economized Operation

ECONOMIZED OPERATION
COMBO ETS1
AND ETS2
EVAPORATOR

ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION
VALVE

SIGHT
GLASS

CONDENSER
FILTER
DRIER

DISCHARGE
SERVICE
LIQUID LEVEL/ VALVE
MOISTURE LIQUID LINE
INDICATOR SERVICE VALVE DISCHARGE
RECEIVER TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

DIGITAL
DIGITAL UNLOADER
ECON. TXV LOADER VALVE
SENSING BULB VALVE
ECONOMIZER
SOLENOID
VALVE

DISCHARGE
PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
ECONOMIZER
TXV

EVAPORATOR PRESSURE
ECONOMIZER TRANSDUCER

SUCTION PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER

SUCTION
SERVICE
COMPRESSOR
VALVE

3–11 T-365
 SECTION 4
MICROPROCESSOR
4.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM
The temperature control Micro-Link 3 microprocessor system (see Figure 4.1) consists of a keypad, display mod-
ule, the control module (controller) and interconnecting wiring. The controller houses the temperature control soft-
ware and the DataCORDER software. The temperature control software functions to operate the unit components
as required to provide the desired cargo temperature and humidity.
The DataCORDER software functions to record unit operating parameters and cargo temperature parameters for
future retrieval. Coverage of the temperature control software begins with Section 4.2. Coverage of the Data-
CORDER software is provided in Section 4.8.
The keypad and display module serve to provide user access and readouts for both of the controller functions, tem-
perature control and DataCORDER. The functions are accessed by keypad selections and viewed on the display
module. The components are designed to permit ease of installation and removal

Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System

4–1 T-365
4.1.1 Key Pad
The key pad (Figure 4.2) is mounted on the control box door. The key pad consists of eleven push button switches
that act as the user’s interface with the controller. Descriptions of the key pad switch functions are provided in
Table 4–1.

Figure 4.2 Key Pad Table 4–1 Key Pad Description

KEY FUNCTION
Code Select Accesses function codes.
Pre-Trip Displays Pre-trip selection menu.
Discontinues Pre-trip in progress.
Alarm List Displays alarm list and clears the
alarm queue.
CODE PRE
SELECT TRIP Manual Defrost / Displays selected defrost mode.
Interval Depressing and holding the Defrost
Interval key for five (5) seconds will
MANUAL initiate defrost using the same logic
ALARM as if the optional manual defrost
DEFROST/
LIST switch was toggled on.
INTERVAL
Enter Confirms a selection or saves a se-
lection to the controller.
Arrow Up Change or scroll a selection up-
ward. Pre-trip advance or test inter-
ruption.

ENTER Arrow Down Change or scroll a selection down-

ward. Pre-trip repeat backward.
Return / Supply Displays non-controlling probe tem-
perature (momentary display)
Celsius / Fahren- Displays alternate English/Metric
heit scale (momentary display). When
set to F, pressure is displayed in
psig and vacuum in “/hg.” “P” ap-
pears after the value to indicate
psig and “i” appears for inches of
mercury.
RETURN C
When set to C, pressure readings
SUPPLY F
are in bars. “b” appears after the
value to indicate bars.
Battery Power Initiate battery backup mode to al-
BATTERY ALT
low set point & function code selec-
POWER MODE
tion if AC power is not connected.
ALT Mode This key is pressed to switch the
functions from the temperature
software to the DataCORDER Soft-
ware. The remaining keys function
the same as described above ex-
cept the readings or changes are
made to the DataCORDER pro-
gramming.

T-365 4–2
4.1.2 Display Module
The display module (Figure 4.3) consists of two five digit displays and seven indicator lights. The indicator lights
include:
• COOL - White or Blue LED: Energized when the refrigerant compressor is energized.
• HEAT - Orange LED: Energized to indicate heater operation in heat mode, defrost mode, or dehumidification.
• DEFROST - Orange LED: Energized when the unit is in defrost mode.
• IN RANGE - Green LED: Energized when the controlled temperature probe is within specified tolerance of
set point.

NOTICE
The controlling probe in perishable range will be the SUPPLY air probe and the controlling probe
in frozen range will be the RETURN air probe.

• ALARM - Red LED: Energized when there is an active or an inactive shutdown alarm in the alarm queue.
• SUPPLY - Yellow LED: Energized when the supply air probe is used for control. When this LED is illumi-
nated, the temperature displayed in the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the reading at the supply air probe.
This LED will flash if dehumidification is enabled.
• RETURN - Yellow LED: Energized when the return air probe is used for control. When this LED is illumi-
nated, the temperature displayed in the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the reading at the return air probe.
This LED will flash if dehumidification is enabled.

Figure 4.3 Display Module

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

4.1.3 Controller

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from controller modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all controller module wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any
part of the container.

! CAUTION
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physically
different and will result in damage to the controller.

NOTICE
Do not attempt to service the controller modules. Breaking the seal will void the warranty.

4–3 T-365
The Micro-Link 3 controller is a dual module microprocessor as shown in Figure 4.4. It is fitted with test points, har-
ness connectors and a software card programming port.

Figure 4.4 Control Module

1 2 3 3 4 5 3 6 7 3 8 3

EN12830
CONTROLLER With

(7.5A)

(7.5A)

KB
OC1
(5A)

(5A)

F3A

F3B

KA
MC
MA

MB
CARRIER

KH
TP
F2

F1
Micro-Link3 DataCORDER S/N: 0491162 REV 5147 YYWW:
T B C1 KD
1035 12-00579-00
KC 59980
KE

1. Mounting Screw 5. Fuses

2. Micro-Link 3 Control/DataCORDER Module 6. Control Circuit Power Connection
3. Connectors 7. Software Programming Port
4. Test Points 8. Battery Pack (Standard Location)
-----

4.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

The controller software is a custom designed program that is subdivided into configuration software and opera-
tional software. The controller software performs the following functions:
• Control supply or return air temperature to required limits, provide modulated refrigeration operation, econo-
mized operation, unloaded operation, electric heat control and defrost. Defrost is performed to clear buildup
of frost and ice in order to ensure proper air flow across the evaporator coil.
• Provide default independent readouts of set point and supply or return air temperatures.
• Provide ability to read and (if applicable) modify the configuration software variables, operating software
Function Codes and Alarm Code indications.
• Provide a Pre-trip step-by-step checkout of refrigeration unit performance including: proper component oper-
ation, electronic and refrigeration control operation, heater operation, probe calibration, pressure limiting and
current limiting settings.
• Provide battery-powered ability to access or change selected codes and set point without AC power con-
nected.
• Provide the ability to reprogram the software through the use of a memory card.

4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables)

Configuration software is a variable listing of the components available for use by the operational software. This
software is factory installed in accordance with the equipment fitted and options listed on the original purchase
order. Changes to the configuration software are required only when a new controller has been installed or a phys-
ical change has been made to the unit such as the addition or removal of an option. A configuration variable list is
provided in Table 4–2. Change to the factory-installed configuration software is achieved via a configuration card
or by communications.

4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes)

The operational software is the actual operation programming of the controller which activates or deactivates com-
ponents in accordance with current unit operating conditions and operator selected modes of operation.
The programming is divided into function codes. Some of the codes are read only while the remaining codes may
be user configured. The value of the user configurable codes can be assigned in accordance with user desired
mode of operation. A list of the function codes is provided in Table 4–3.

T-365 4–4
To access the function codes, perform the following:

1. Press the CODE SELECT key, then press an arrow key until the left window displays the desired code number.

2. The right window will display the selected function code value for five seconds before returning to normal
display mode.

3. If additional time is required, pressing the ENTER key will extend the display time to 30 seconds.

4.3 CONTROLLER SEQUENCE AND MODES OF OPERATION

General operation sequences for cooling, heating and defrost are provided in the following sub-paragraphs. Sche-
matic representation of controller operation is provided in Figure 4.5 and Figure 4.8.
Operational software responds to various inputs. These inputs come from the temperature sensors and pressure
transducers, the temperature set point, the settings of the configuration variables and the function code assignments.
The action taken by the operational software changes as the input values change. Overall interaction of the inputs is
described as a “mode” of operation. The modes of operation include perishable (chill) mode and frozen mode.
Descriptions of the controller interaction and modes of operation are provided in the following sub paragraphs.

4.3.1 Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence

At start up, the controller logic checks for proper phase sequencing and compressor rotation. If incorrect sequenc-
ing is causing the compressor and three-phase evaporator and condenser fan motors to rotate in the wrong direc-
tion, the controller will energize or de-energize relay TCP as required (see Figure 8.2). Relay TCP will switch its
contacts, energizing or de-energizing relays PA and PB. Relay PA is wired to energize the circuits on L1, L2 and
L3. Relay PB is wired to energize the circuits on L3, L2, and L1, thus providing reverse rotation.

4.3.2 Start Up - Compressor Bump Start

At start up, the controller logic will initiate a compressor bump start procedure to clear liquid refrigerant from the
compressor. If suction and discharge pressures have equalized, the compressor will perform three compressor
bump starts. A compressor bump start may also occur after a defrost cycle has been completed.
During Bump Start, the EEV will close. Relays TS, TG, TN, TE, and TV will be de-energized (opened). The result of
this action will close the ESV and shut all fans off. The compressor will start for 1 second, then pause for five sec-
onds. This sequence will be repeated two more times. After the final bump start the unit will pre-position the EEV to
the correct starting position, pause and start up.

4.3.3 Perishable Mode Temperature Control

In Perishable Mode, the controller maintains the supply air temperature at set point, the SUPPLY indicator light is
illuminated and the default reading on the display window is the supply temperature sensor reading.
When the supply air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.
When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, perishable mode is active with set points above -10°C
(+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, perishable mode is active with set points above -5°C (+23°F).

4.3.4 Perishable Steady State

Perishable Steady State is used to maintain he control temperature near a set point that is above the heat lockout
temperature.
On a properly loaded box, the unit will operate in steady state mode. This results in unloaded operation by cycling
the DLV and DUV to limit capacity and maintain steady temperature control.
The unit is capable of maintaining supply to within +/-0.2°C (+/-0.36°F) of set point. Supply air temperature is con-
trolled by positioning of the EEV, cycling of DLV and DUV, cycling of the compressor, and cycling of the heaters.

4.3.5 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation

Perishable Idle Mode is used when it is unnecessary to run the compressor to maintain control temperature. If tem-
perature drops to 0.2°C (0.36°F) above set point, the controller determines that cooling is not required or the con-
troller logic determines suction pressure is at the low pressure limit, the unit will transition to Perishable Idle Mode.
During Perishable Idle Mode, the compressor is turned off, but the evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air
throughout the container. If temperature rises +0.2°C (+0.36°F) above set point, the unit will transition back to per-
ishable steady state.

4–5 T-365
4.3.6 Perishable Heating
When it is necessary to raise the control temperature, the system will enter Perishable Heating Mode. If the tem-
perature drops to 0.5°C (0.9°F) below set point, the unit will transition to Perishable Heating Mode, and the heaters
will be energized. The unit will transition back to Perishable Idle Mode when the temperature rises to 0.2°C
(0.36°F) below the set point, and the heaters will de-energize.

4.3.7 Perishable Pulldown

When the system is in Perishable Pulldown Mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to set
point. When cooling from a temperature that is more than 2.5°C (4.5°F) above set point, the system will be in per-
ishable pulldown mode in economized operation. However, pressure and current limit functions may restrict the
valves if either exceeds the preset value.
Once set point is reached, the unit will transition to perishable steady state mode. This results in unloaded opera-
tion by cycling the DLV and DUV to limit capacity and maintain steady temperature control.

Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode

Perishable Mode Pull Down

(Only Applicable to Perishable Mode)
Controller Set Point ABOVE ï10qC (+14qF),
Controller Set Point ABOVE ï10qC (+14qF),
orï5qC (+23qF) optionally
orï5qC (+23qF) optionally

+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)
Cooling, Cooling,
Unloaded Economized
Set +.20qC
Point Set
Cooling, Point
ï.20qC Air Circulation ï.25qC Unloaded
ï.20qC ï.20qC
Air Circulation
ï.50qC
ï.50qC

Heating
Heating

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

4.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification

Dehumidification is provided to reduce the humidity levels inside the container, the dehumidification set point range
is from 50% to 95%. Dehumidification is activated when a humidity value is set at Cd33. During dehumidification
operation the condenser fan speed is fixed in high speed. The yellow SUPPLY LED will flash ON and OFF every
second to indicate that dehumidification is active. Once dehumidification is active and the following conditions are
satisfied, the controller will activate the heat relay to begin dehumidification.
• The humidity sensor reading is above the humidity set point (Cd33).
• The unit is in perishable steady state and supply air temperature is less than 0.25°C (0.45°F) above set point.
• The heater debounce timer (three minutes) has timed out.
• Heater termination thermostat (HTT) is closed.

T-365 4–6
If the previously mentioned conditions are true for at least one hour, the evaporator fans will switch from high
speed to low speed. Evaporator fan speed will then switch every hour, as long as the 4 conditions are met (see
Bulb Mode, Section 4.3.9 for different evaporator fan speed options).
If any condition except item (1) becomes false OR if the relative humidity sensed is 2% below the dehumidification
set point, the high speed evaporator fans will be energized.
During dehumidification power is applied to the defrost heaters. This added heat load causes the controller to open
the EEV to match the increased heat load while still holding the supply air temperature very close to the set point.
Opening the EEV reduces the temperature of the evaporator coil surface, which increases the rate at which water
is condensed and removes water from the passing air. Removing water from the air reduces the relative humidity.
When the relative humidity sensed is 2% below set point, the controller de-energizes the heat relay. The controller
will continue to cycle heating to maintain relative humidity below the selected set point. If dehumidification is termi-
nated by a condition other than the humidity sensor, e.g., an out-of-range or compressor shutdown condition, the
heat relay is de-energized immediately.
Two timers are activated during dehumidification to prevent rapid cycling and consequent contactor wear:
• Heater debounce timer (three minutes) - The heater debounce timer is started whenever the heater contac-
tor status is changed. The heat contactor remains energized (or de-energized) for at least three minutes
even if the set point criteria are satisfied.
• Out-of-range timer (five minutes) - The out-of-range timer is started to maintain heater operation during a
temporary out-of-range condition. If supply air temperature remains outside of the user selected in-range
setting for more than five minutes, the heaters will be de-energized to allow the system to recover. The out-
of-range timer starts as soon as temperature exceeds in-range tolerance value set by Cd30.

4.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode

Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification which allows changes to the evaporator fan speed and/or defrost
termination set points.
Bulb mode is active when Cd35 is set to “Bulb.” Once bulb mode is activated, the user may then change dehumid-
ification evaporator fan operation from the default (speed alternates from low to high each hour) to constant low or
constant high speed. This is done by toggling Cd36 from its default of “alt” to “Lo” or “Hi” as desired. If low speed
evaporator fan operation is selected, this gives the user the additional capability of selecting dehumidification set
points from 50 to 95%.
In addition, if bulb mode is active, Cd37 may be set to override the previous defrost termination thermostat (DTT)
settings. The temperature at which the DTT will be considered “open” may be changed [in 0.1°C (0.2°F) incre-
ments] to any value between 25.6°C (78°F) and 4°C (39.2°F). The temperature at which the DTT is considered
closed for interval timer start or demand defrost is 10°C (50°F) for “open” values from 25.6°C (78°F) down to a
10°C (50°F) setting. For “open” values lower than 10°C, the “closed” values will decrease to the same value as the
“open” setting. Bulb mode is terminated when:
• Bulb mode code Cd35 is set to “Nor.”
• Dehumidification code Cd33 is set to “Off.”
• The user changes the set point to one that is in the frozen range.
When bulb mode is disabled by any of the above conditions, evaporator fan operation for dehumidification reverts
to “alt” and the DTS termination setting resets to the value determined by CnF41.

4.3.10 Perishable Economy

Economy fan mode is an extension of the Perishable Mode, and is provided for power saving purposes. Economy
fan mode is activated when Cd34 (also used for Frozen Economy Mode) is set to “ON.” Economy fan mode is used
in the transportation of temperature-tolerant cargo or non-respiration items which do not require high airflow for
removing respiration heat.
There is no active display that indicates that economy fan mode has been initiated. To check for economy fan
mode, perform a manual display of Cd34.
In order to initiate economy fan mode, a perishable set point must be selected prior to activation. When economy
fan mode is active, the evaporator fans will be controlled as follows:

4–7 T-365
At the start of each cooling or heating cycle, the evaporator fans will run in high speed for three minutes. They will
then be switched to low speed any time the supply air temperature is within +/- 0.2°C (0.36°F) of the set point and
the return air temperature is less than or equal to the supply air temperature +3°C (5.4°F). The fans will continue to
run in low speed for one hour. At the end of the hour, the evaporator fans will switch back to high speed and the
cycle will be repeated. If bulb mode is active, economy fan mode will be overridden.

4.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

NOTICE
In Standard Perishable Mode, the evaporator motors run in high speed. In Economy Fan Mode,
the fan speed is varied.

a. When supply air temperature is above set point and decreasing, the unit will cool with the condenser fan
motor (CF and FS), compressor motor (CH), evaporator fan motors (EF) energized, and the white COOL
light illuminated. (See Figure 4.6).

Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED

ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC CH

TN IP-CM TG LC CF

FS

TG CF FS LC

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

b. When supply air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above set point (Cd30), the green IN
RANGE light is illuminated.

c. Condenser fan speed will change dependent on the following conditions:

Change high speed to low speed (LC):
Compressor loading ratio falls below 38%
Change low speed to high speed:
Compressor loading ratio above 45%
If compressor discharge pressure is above 200psig and condenser fan speed is high speed, then it will ratio.

d. The controller continuously monitors supply air temperature. Once the supply air temperature falls below set
point, the controller periodically records supply air temperature, set point and time. A calculation is then per-
formed to determine temperature drift from set point over time. If the calculation determines that cooling is
no longer required, contacts TC and TN are opened to de-energize the compressor motor and the con-
denser fan motor. In addition the controller will close the EEV.

e. The evaporator fan motors continue to run to circulate air throughout the container. The green IN RANGE
light remains illuminated as long as the supply air temperature is within tolerance of the set point.

T-365 4–8
 f. If the supply air temperature increases to 0.2°C (0.36°F) above set point, contacts TC and TN close to
restart the compressor and condenser fan motors in standard steady state operation. The white COOL light
is also illuminated.

g. If the supply air increases more than 2.5°C (4.5°F) above set point temperature, contacts TS will close to
energize and open the ESV, placing the unit in pull down mode.

4.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation

a. If the supply air temperature decreases 0.5°C (0.9°F) below set point, the system enters the heating mode.
(See Figure 4.5). The controller closes contacts TH (see Figure 4.7) to allow power flow through the heat
termination thermostat (HTT) to energize the heaters (HR). The orange HEAT light is also illuminated. The
evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout the container.

b. When the supply air temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.36°F) below set point, contact TH opens to de-energize
the heaters. The orange HEAT light is also de-energized. The evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air
throughout the container.

c. The safety heater termination thermostat (HTT) is attached to an evaporator coil circuit and will open the
heating circuit if overheating occurs.

Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC CH

TN IP-CM TG LC CF

FS

TG CF FS LC

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

NOTICE
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. For full diagrams and
legend, see Section 8.

4.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat

If the system capacity has been decreased to the lowest allowable capacity and conditions exist that warrant max-
imum temperature stability the controller will pulse the HR relay to energize the evaporator heaters in sequence
with the compressor digital signal.

4.3.14 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control

In Frozen Mode, the controller maintains the return air temperature at set point, the yellow RETURN indicator light
is illuminated, and the default reading on the display window is the return temperature sensor (RTS) reading.
When the return air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.

4–9 T-365
When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, frozen mode is active with set points below -10°C
(+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, frozen mode is active with set points below -5°C (+23°F).
When the system is in Frozen Mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to set point, the
system will remain in economized operation.

4.3.15 Frozen Steady State

Frozen cargos are not sensitive to minor temperature changes, and the frozen temperature control system takes
advantage of this to greatly improve the energy efficiency of the unit. Frozen range temperature control is accom-
plished by cycling the compressor on and off as the load demand requires.

4.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode

When temperature drops to set point minus 0.2°C (0.4°F) and the compressor has run for at least five minutes, the
unit will transition to the frozen idle mode. The compressor is turned off and the evaporator fans continue to run to
circulate air throughout the container. If temperature rises above set point +0.2°C, (0.4°F) the unit will transition
back to the frozen steady state mode.

Figure 4.8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode

Frozen Mode
Controller Set Point at or BELOW ï10qC (+14qF),
or ï5qC (+23qF) optionally
+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)

Cooling,
Economized

+.20qC
Set Point
ï.20qC

Air Circulation

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

4.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode

If the temperature drops 10°C (18°F) below set point, the unit will transition to the frozen “heating” mode. The evap-
orator fans are brought to high speed, and the heat from the fans is circulated through the container. The unit will
transition back to frozen steady state when the temperature rises back to the transition point.

T-365 4–10
4.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode
In order to activate Frozen Economy Mode, a frozen set point temperature must be selected, and Cd34 (Economy
Mode) set to “ON.” When economy mode is active, the system will perform normal frozen mode operations except
that the entire refrigeration system, excluding the controller, will be turned off when the control temperature is less
than or equal to the set point -2°C (4°F).
After an off-cycle period of 60 minutes, the unit will turn on high speed evaporator fans for three minutes, and then
check the control temperature. If the control temperature is greater than or equal to the frozen set point +0.2°C
(0.4°F), the unit will restart the refrigeration system and continue to cool until the off-cycle temperature criteria are
met. If the control temperature is less than the frozen set point +0.2°C (0.4°F) the unit will turn off the evaporator
fans and restart another 60 minute off-cycle.

4.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

a. When the return air temperature is above set point and decreasing, the unit will transition to economized
cooling with the condenser fan motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), economizer solenoid valve (ESV), low
speed evaporator fan motors (ES) energized and the white COOL light illuminated. (See Figure 4.9).

b. When the return air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above set point, the green
INRANGE light is illuminated.

c. When the return air temperature decreases to 0.2°C (0.4°F) below set point, contacts TC, TS and TN are
opened to de-energize the compressor, economizer solenoid valve and condenser fan motor. The white
COOL light is also de-energized. The EEV will close.

d. The evaporator fan motors continue to run in low speed to circulate air throughout the container. The green
IN-RANGE light remains illuminated as long as the return air is within tolerance of set point.

e. If return air temperature drops to 10°C (18°F) or more below set point, the evaporator fans increase to high
speed.

f. When the return air temperature increases to 0.2°C (0.4°F) above set point and three minutes have elapsed,
the EEV opens and contacts TC, TS and TN close to restart the compressor, open the ESV and restart the
condenser fan motor. The white COOL is illuminated.

Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED

ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC CH

TN IP-CM TG LC CF

FS

TG CF FS LC

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

NOTICE
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. Complete schematics
and legends are located in Section 8.

4–11 T-365
4.3.20 Defrost
Defrost is initiated to remove ice buildup from the evaporator coil which can obstruct air flow and reduce the cooling
capacity of the unit. The defrost cycle may consist of up to three distinct operations depending upon the reason for
the defrost or model number configuration. The first is de-icing of the coil, the second is defrost due to a probe
check cycle and the third is a snap freeze process based on the unit model configuration.
Defrosting the coil consists of removing power to the cooling components (compressor, evaporator fans, and
condenser fan), closing the EEV, and turning on the heaters, which are located below the evaporator coil.
During normal operation, de-icing will continue until temperatures indicate that the ice on the coil has been
removed, proper air flow has been restored, and the unit is ready to control temperature efficiently.
If defrost was initiated by the probe check logic, then the Probe Check is carried out after the completion of the
defrost cycle. A Probe Check is initiated only when there is an inaccuracy between the controller temperature
sensors. For more information on Probe Check refer to Section 5.9.
Snap Freeze allows the system to cool for a period of time after de-icing, with the evaporator fans turned off and
is only carried out if configured by model number. Snap-Freeze allows for the removal of latent de-icing heat
from the evaporator coils, and freezes any remaining moisture that might otherwise be blown into the container.

4.3.21 Defrost Operation

Initiation of defrost is dependent on the state of the Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS). When then (DTS) senses
a temperature less than 10°C (50°F) the defrost options become active and the timer is engaged for the initiation of
the defrost cycle. The defrost time accumulates when the compressor is running. In the perishable mode this is the
same as real time as the compressor in general runs continuously. In frozen mode the actual time necessary to
count down to the next defrost will exceed the defrost interval depending on the compressor duty-cycle.
When the defrost mode is in the active state, defrost can be initiated when any one of the following additional con-
ditions become true:

1. Manually: A manual defrost is initiated by pressing the MANUAL DEFROST/INTERVAL key for greater than
5 seconds.

2. Timer: The Defrost Interval Timer reaches the user selectable Interval. The user-selected intervals are (OFF),
3, 6, 9, 12, 24 hours, AUTO, or PuLS; factory default is 3 hours. Refer to code select CD27 (Table 4–2).

a. Automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost at three hours and then adjusts the interval to the next
defrost based on the accumulation of ice on the evaporator coil. Following a start-up or after termination
of defrost, the time will not begin counting down until the DTS reading falls below 10°C (50°F). If the
reading of DTS rises above termination setting any time during the timer count down, the interval is reset
and the countdown starts over. The Auto defrost time is reset to three hours start time after every PTI ini-
tiation or trip start interval.

b. Fan Pulsing Logic is used to help prevent ice formation in the drain gutter and drain cup and ice buildup
in supply air channel by using the evaporator fans to blow the warm air onto these areas during unit
defrost. When cooling at lower setpoints, evaporator fan pulsing can be used during Defrost/De-ice when
the “PuLS” option is selected in the Defrost Interval function select code. When enabled, evaporator fan
pulsing will occur based on the unit temperature setpoint and the Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature
Setting (Cd60). QUEST II also pulses the evaporator fans during Defrost/De-ice within a narrow perish-
able setpoint range. The logic for each evaporator fan pulsing feature is described below.

c. After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used until the next defrost ter-
mination, the next time the DTS contacts are OPEN, or the next time power to the control is interrupted. If
the previous value or the new value is “OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.

3. Probe Check: If defrost is initiated due to Probe Check immediately following the defrost cycle the evapora-
tion fans are started and run for eight minutes to stabilize the temperature throughout the container. A probe
check comparison is carried out at the end of the eight minute period if any sensor is found out of calibration.
At this time its alarm set is no longer used for control/reorder purposes.

4. Probe Check Logic: The logic determines that a Probe Check is necessary based on temperature values
currently reported by the supply and return probes.

5. Remote: An Initiate Defrost command is sent via communications.

T-365 4–12
 6. Delta T Logic: If the difference between return and supply air temperature (Delta T) becomes too great indi-
cating possible reduced airflow over the evaporator coil caused by ice buildup requiring a defrost.

a. In Perishable Pull Down - Delta T increases to greater than 12°C, and 90 minutes of compressor run time
have been recorded.

b. In Perishable Steady State – A baseline Delta T is recorded following the first defrost cycle after steady
state conditions are reached, (the unit is cooling, and the evaporator fans and heaters must remain in a
stable state for a period of five minutes). Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 4°C
above the baseline, and 90 minutes of compressor run time have been recorded.

c. In Frozen Mode - Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 16°C and 90 minutes of
compressor run time have been recorded.

NOTICE
When defrost is initiated, the controller closes the EEV, opens contacts TC, TN and TE (or TV)
to de-energize the compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fans.

NOTICE
The controller then closes contacts TH to supply power to the heaters. The orange DEFROST
light and heat light are illuminated and the COOL light is also de-energized.

Figure 4.10 Defrost

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC CH

TN IP-CM TG LC CF

FS

TG CF FS LC

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. Complete schematics and legends are
located in Section 8.
Defrost will terminate when the DTS reading rises above one of two model number configurable options selection,
either an upper setting of 25.6°C (78°F) which is default or lower setting of 18°C (64°F).
When the DTS reading rises to the configured setting, the de-icing operation is terminated.

4.3.22 Defrost Related Parameters

DTS Failure
When the return air temperature falls to 7°C (45°F), the controller ensures that the defrost temperature sensor
(DTS) reading has dropped to 10°C or below. If it has not, it indicates a failed DTS. A DTS failure alarm is triggered
and the defrost mode is operated by the return temperature sensor (RTS). Defrost will terminate after 1 hour. If the
DTS fails to reach is termination setting, the defrost terminate after 2 hours of operation.

4–13 T-365
Defrost Timer
If CnF23 is configured to “SAv” (save), then the value of the defrost interval timer will be saved at power down and
restored at power up. This option prevents short power interruptions from resetting an almost expired defrost inter-
val, and possibly delaying a needed defrost cycle. If the save option is not selected the defrost timer will re-initiate
and begin recounting.
If CnF11 is model number configured to OFF the operator will be allowed to choose “OFF” as a defrost interval
option.
If CnF64 is configured in the operator will be allowed to choose “PuLS” as a defrost interval option. For units oper-
ating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval is determined by the unit temperature setpoint and the Evaporator Fan
Pulsing Temperature Setting (Cd60). When the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or less than the Evaporator
Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost interval is deter-
mined using the Automatic Defrost Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains displayed in this
function select code.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to ’AUTO’ unless CnF49 (OEM Reset) is set to “Custom”
AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic) configuration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27 will be set to
“PuLS”.
If defrost does not terminate correctly and temperature reaches the set point of the Heat Termination Thermostat
(HTT) 54°C (130°F), the HTT will open to de-energize the heaters (AL59 & AL60). If the HTT does not open and
termination does not occur within two hours, the controller will terminate defrost. AL60 will be activated to inform of
a possible DTS failure.

4.4 PROTECTION MODES OF OPERATION

4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation

Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will shut down the unit.

4.4.2 Failure Action

Function code Cd29 may be operator set to select action the controller will take upon system failure. The factory
default is full system shutdown. Refer to Table 4–3.

4.4.3 Generator Protection

Function codes Cd31 (Stagger Start, Offset Time) and Cd32 (Current Limit) may be operator set to control the start
up sequence of multiple units and operating current draw. The factory default allows on demand starting (no delay)
of units and normal current draw. Refer to Table 4–3.

4.4.4 Compressor High Temperature Protection

The controller continuously monitors compressor discharge pressure and temperature, and suction pressure. If
discharge pressure or temperature rises above the allowed limit or suction pressure falls below the allowed limit,
the compressor will be cycled off and on every 3 minutes. Condenser and evaporator fans will continue to operate
during the compressor off cycle.
If high compressor dome temperature occurs, as measured by the CPDS, the controller will allow additional refrig-
erant to be released into the system in order to provide cooling to the evaporator coil and compressor dome. The
controller is alerted to high compressor dome temperatures via the CPDS when ambient temperature is greater
than 43.3°C, return air temperature is less than -17.5°C and the compressor discharge temperature is greater than
117.7°C.
Dome temperature control logic will disengage when return air temperature and ambient temperature return to
allowed limits or when the compressor turns off.

4.4.5 Compressor Low Pressure Protection

If the suction pressure low limit is triggered, the DUV will energize to raise the suction pressure.

T-365 4–14
4.4.6 Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regulation
In perishable mode, system pressures may need to be regulated at ambient temperatures of 20°C (68°F) and
below. Once below this ambient temperature, the condenser fan may cycle on and off based on limits imposed for
discharge pressure. For extremely cold ambient temperatures, -18°C (0°F), heater cycling may occur within normal
system operation based on discharge pressure limits.

4.4.7 Condenser Fan Override

When CnF17 (Discharge Temperature Sensor) is set to “In” and CnF48 (Condenser Fan Switch Override) is set to
“On”, the condenser fan switch override logic is activated. If condenser cooling water pressure is sufficient to open
the water pressure switch (de-energizing the condenser fan) when water flow or pressure conditions are not main-
taining discharge temperature, the logic will energize the condenser fan as follows:

1. If the DLV/DUV is cycling at less than 80% capacity when the controller calls for it to be 100% open, the con-
denser fan is energized. When the DLV/DUV regains full capacity, the fan will de-energize.

2. If DPT reading is invalid or out of range (AL65), the condenser fan is energized and will remain energized
until system power is cycled.

3. If the system is running on condenser fan override and the high pressure switch opens, the condenser fan is
energized and will remain energized until the system power is cycled.

4.5 QUEST - CCPC

Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a method of temperature control used during steady-state per-
ishable cooling that cycles the compressor on and off according to return air temperature.
To be eligible for steady-state control the unit must first complete a setpoint pulldown phase and a CCPC pulldown
phase:
During setpoint pulldown supply air temperature is controlled according to the unit’s nominal supply air setpoint.
During CCPC pulldown the supply air temperature is lowered somewhat relative to the nominal setpoint. Evap-
orator fans are forced to operate at high speed.
Steady-state CCPC control maintains the same lowered supply air temperature that was used during CCPC pull-
down. The compressor cycles on and off according to return air high and low limits. Depending on the fan mode of
operation selected, the evaporator fans may be programmed to run at low speed some or all of the time according
to the control logic.

4.6 CONTROLLER ALARMS

Alarm display is an independent controller software function. If an operating parameter is outside of expected
range or a component does not return the correct signals back to the controller, an alarm is generated. A listing of
the alarms is provided in Table 4–6.
The alarm philosophy balances the protection of the refrigeration unit and that of the refrigerated cargo. The action
taken when an error is detected always considers the survival of the cargo. Rechecks are made to confirm that an
error actually exists.
Some alarms requiring compressor shutdown have time delays before and after to try to keep the compressor on
line. An example is alarm code “LO,” (low main voltage), when a voltage drop of over 25% occurs, an indication is
given on the display, but the unit will continue to run.
When an Alarm Occurs:

a. The red ALARM light will energize for critical alarm code numbers 17, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, and 27.

b. If a detectable problem exists, its alarm code will be alternately displayed with the set point on the left display.

c. The user should scroll through the alarm list to determine what alarms exist or have existed. Alarms must be
diagnosed and corrected before the Alarm List can be cleared.

4–15 T-365
To Display Alarm Codes:

1. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALARM LIST key. This accesses the Alarm List Display Mode,
which displays any alarms archived in the alarm queue.

2. The alarm queue stores up to 16 alarms in the sequence in which they occurred. The user may scroll
through the list by depressing an ARROW key.

3. The left display will show “AL##,” where ## is the alarm number sequentially in the queue.

4. The right display will show the actual alarm code. “AA##” will display for an active alarm, where “##” is the
alarm code. Or “IA##” will display for an inactive alarm, refer to Table 4–6.

5. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active.

6. “CLEAr” is displayed if all alarms are inactive. The alarm queue may then be cleared by pressing the ENTER
key. The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.

NOTICE
AL26 is active when all of the sensors are not responding. Check the connector at the back of the
controller; if it is loose or unplugged, reconnect it, then run a Pre-trip test (P5) to clear AL26.

4.7 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS

Pre-trip Diagnostics is an independent controller function that suspends normal refrigeration controller activities
and provides preprogrammed test routines. The test routine can be run in Auto Mode, which automatically per-
forms a pre programmed sequence of tests, or Manual Mode, which allows the operator to select and run any of
the individual tests.

! CAUTION
Pre-trip diagnostics should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the con-
tainer.

! CAUTION
When PRE-TRIP key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated.
At the completion of Pre-trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reac-
tivated.

A Pre-trip test may be initiated by use of the keypad or via communication, but when initiated by communication
the controller will execute the entire battery of tests (auto mode).
At the end of a Pre-trip test, the message “P,” “rSLts” (pretest results) will be displayed. Pressing ENTER will allow
the user to see the results for each of the sub-tests. The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for each test
run to completion.
A detailed description of the Pre-trip tests and test codes is provided in Table 4–4. Detailed operating instructions
are provided in Section 5.8.

4.8 DATACORDER

4.8.1 Description
Carrier Transicold “DataCORDER” software is integrated into the controller and serves to eliminate the tempera-
ture recorder and paper chart. DataCORDER functions may be accessed by keypad selections and viewed on the
display module. The unit is also fitted with interrogation connections (see Figure 4.1) which may be used with the
Carrier Transicold DataReader to download data. A personal computer with Carrier Transicold DataLINE software
installed may also be used to download data and configure settings.

T-365 4–16
DataCORDER settings:
• Configuration Software
• Operational Software
• Data Storage Memory
• Real Time Clock (with internal battery backup)
• Six Thermistor Inputs
• Interrogation Connections
• Power Supply (battery pack)

DataCORDER functions:

a. Logs data at 15, 30, 60 or 120 minute intervals and stores two years of data (based on one hour interval).

b. Records and displays alarms on the display module.

c. Records results of Pre-trip testing.

d. Records DataCORDER and temperature control software generated data and events as follows:
• Container ID Change
• Software Upgrades
• Alarm Activity
• Battery Low (battery pack)
• Data Retrieval
• Defrost Start and End
• Dehumidification Start and End
• Power Loss (with and without battery pack)
• Power Up (with and without battery pack)
• Remote Probe Temperatures in the Container (USDA Cold treatment and Cargo probe recording)
• Return Air Temperature
• Set Point Change
• Supply Air Temperature
• Real Time Clock Battery (Internal) Replacement
• Real Time Clock Modification
• Trip Start
• ISO Trip Header (When entered via Interrogation program)
• Economy Mode Start and End
• “Auto 1/Auto 2/Auto 3” Pre-trip Start and End
• Bulb Mode Start
• Bulb Mode Changes
• Bulb Mode End
• USDA Trip Comment
• Humidification Start and End
• USDA Probe Calibration
• Fresh Air Vent Position

4–17 T-365
4.8.2 DataCORDER Software
The DataCORDER Software is subdivided into Operational Software, Configuration Software, and the Data Memory.

Operational Software
The Operational Software reads and interprets inputs for use by the Configuration Software. The inputs are labeled
Function Codes. Controller functions (see Table 4–5) which the operator may access to examine the current input
data or stored data. To access these codes, do the following:

1. Press the ALT. MODE and CODE SELECT keys.

2. Press an arrow key until the left window displays the desired code number. The right window will display the
value of this item for five seconds before returning to the normal display mode.

3. If a longer display time is desired, press the ENTER key to extend the display time to five minutes.

Configuration Software
The recording and alarm functions of the DataCORDER are based on the configurations. Reprogramming to the
factory installed configuration is achieved via a configuration card. Changes to the unit DataCORDER configuration
may be made using the DataLINE interrogation software.
A listing of the configuration variables is provided in Table 4–2. Descriptions of DataCORDER operation for each
variable setting are provided in the following paragraphs.

4.8.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02)

Two modes of operation may be configured: the Standard Mode and the Generic Mode.

Standard Mode
In Standard Mode, the user may configure the DataCORDER to record data using one of seven standard configu-
rations.
The seven standard configuration variables, with their descriptions, are listed in Table 4–3.
The inputs of the six thermistors (supply, return, USDA #1, #2, #3 and cargo probe) and the humidity sensor input
will be generated by the DataCORDER. Figure 4.11

NOTICE
The DataCORDER software uses the supply and return recorder sensors (SRS, RRS). The tem-
perature control software uses the supply and return temperature sensors (STS, RTS).

Generic Mode
Generic recording mode allows user selection of the network data points to be recorded. The user may select up to
a total of eight data points for recording. A list of data points available for recording follows. Changing the configu-
ration to generic and selecting which data points to record may be done using the Carrier Transicold Data Retrieval
Program.

1. Control mode

2. Control temperature

3. Frequency

4. Humidity

5. Phase A current

6. Phase B current

7. Phase C current

8. Main voltage

T-365 4–18
 9. Evaporator expansion valve percentage

10.Discrete outputs (Bit mapped - require special handling if used)

11. Discrete inputs (Bit mapped - require special handling if used)

12.Ambient temperature sensor (AMBS)

13.Evaporator temperature sensor (ETS)

14.Compressor discharge sensor (CPDS)

15.Return temperature sensor (RTS)

16.Supply temperature sensor (STS)

17.Defrost temperature sensor (DTS)

18.Discharge pressure transducer (DPT)

19.Suction pressure transducer (SPT)

20.Flash tank pressure transducer (FPT)

21.Vent position sensor (VPS)

-----

4.8.4 Logging Interval (dCF03)

The user may select four different time intervals between data recordings. Data is logged at exact intervals in
accordance with the real time clock. The clock is factory set at Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

4.8.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04)

The user may configure the format in which thermistor readings are recorded. The short resolution is a 1 byte for-
mat and the long resolution is a 2 byte format. The short requires less memory and records temperature with vari-
able resolutions depending on temperature range. The long records temperature in 0.01°C (0.02°F) steps for the
entire range.

CONFIGURATION NO. TITLE DEFAULT OPTION

dCF01 (Future Use) -- --
dCF02 Sensor Configuration 2 2,5,6,9,54,64,94
dCF03 Logging Interval (Minutes) 60 15,30,60,120
dCF04 Thermistor Format Short Long
dCF05 Thermistor Sampling Type A A,b,C
dCF06 Controlled Atmosphere/Humidity Sampling Type A A,b
dCF07 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 1 A Auto, On, Off
dCF08 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 2 A Auto, On, Off
dCF09 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 3 A Auto, On, Off
dCF10 Alarm Configuration Cargo Sensor A A Auto, On, Off

4–19 T-365
 Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Download Report

Raw Data Report for ABC1234567

May 31, 2007 to Jun 04, 2007
System Configuration at the Time of Interrogation:
Interrogated On May 05, 2007
Extracted by DataLINE Rev 1.0.0

Controller Software: 5327

Controller Serial #: 04163552

Bill of Lading #: 1
Origin: Origin Date:
Destination: Discharge Date:
Comment: DataLINE Tool
Probe Calibration Readings: USDA1: 0.0 USDA2: 0.0 USDA3: 0.0 Cargo: 0.0
Temperature Units: Centigrade
________________________________________________________________________________________
May 31, 2007
Setpoint: 1.66, Container : Serial : 04189552
9 Sensors Logged at 15 Minute Interval
Sensor Format Resolution

T-365 4–20
 Standard Configuration Description
2 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
(dCF02=2)
5 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
(dCF02=5) 3 USDA thermistor inputs
6 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
(dCF02=6) 3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
9 sensors Not Applicable
(dCF02=9)
6 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
(dCF02=54) 3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
7 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
(dCF02=64) 3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
10 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
(dCF02=94) 3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)

4.8.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06)

Three types of data sampling are available: average, snapshot and USDA. When configured to average, the aver-
age of readings taken every minute over the recording period is recorded. When configured to snapshot, the sen-
sor reading at the log interval time is recorded. When USDA is configured, supply and return temperature readings
are averaged and the three USDA probe readings are snapshot.

4.8.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10)

USDA and cargo probe alarms may be configured to OFF, ON or AUTO.
If a probe alarm is configured to OFF, the alarm for this probe is always disabled.
If a probe alarm is configured to ON, the associated alarm is always enabled.
If the probes are configured to AUTO, they act as a group. This function is designed to assist users who keep the
DataCORDER configured for USDA recording, but do not install the probes for every trip. If all the probes are dis-
connected, no alarms are activated. As soon as one of the probes is installed, all of the alarms are enabled and the
remaining probes that are not installed will give active alarm indications.

4.8.8 DataCORDER Power Up

The DataCORDER may be powered up in any one of four ways:

1. Normal AC power: The DataCORDER is powered up when the unit is turned on via the Stop-Start switch.

2. Controller DC battery pack power: If a battery pack is installed, the DataCORDER will power up for commu-
nication when an interrogation cable is plugged into an interrogation receptacle.

3. External DC battery pack power: A 12 volt battery pack may also be plugged into the back of the interroga-
tion cable, which is then plugged into an interrogation port. No controller battery pack is required with this
method.

4. Real Time Clock demand: If the DataCORDER is equipped with a charged battery pack and AC power is not
present, the DataCORDER will power up when the real time clock indicates that a data recording should
take place. When the DataCORDER is finished recording, it will power down.

4–21 T-365
During DataCORDER power-up, while using battery-pack power, the controller will perform a hardware voltage
check on the battery. If the hardware check passes, the controller will energize and perform a software battery volt-
age check before DataCORDER logging. If either test fails, the real time clock battery power-up will be disabled
until the next AC power cycle. Further DataCORDER temperature logging will be prohibited until that time.
An alarm will be generated when the battery voltage transitions from good to bad indicating that the battery pack
needs recharging. If the alarm condition persists for more than 24 hours on continuous AC power, it indicates that
the battery pack needs replacement.

4.8.9 Pre-Trip Data Recording

The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a Pre-trip test (refer to Section 5.8) and the results of each test
included in Pre-trip. The data is time-stamped and may be extracted via the Data Retrieval program. Refer to Table
4–6 for a description of the data stored in the DataCORDER for each corresponding Pre-trip test.

4.8.10 DataCORDER Communications

Data retrieval from the DataCORDER can be accomplished by using the DataLINE, DataBANK Card, or a commu-
nications interface module.

NOTICE
A DataLINE or a communications interface module display of Communication Failed is caused
by faulty data transfer between the DataCORDER and the data retrieval device.
Common causes include:

1. Bad cable or connection between DataCORDER and data retrieval device.

2. PC communication port(s) unavailable or mis-assigned.

Configuration identification for the models covered herein may be obtained on the Container Products Group Infor-
mation Center by authorized Carrier Transicold Service Centers.

a. DataLINE
The DataLINE software for a personal computer is supplied on both floppy disks and CD. This software
allows interrogation, configuration variable assignment, screen view of the data, hard copy report genera-
tion, cold treatment probe calibration and file management. Refer to Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for a
more detailed explanation of the DataLINE interrogation software. The DataLINE manual may be found on
the internet at www.container.carrier.com.

b. DataBANK Card
The DataBANK™card is a PCMCIA card that interfaces with the controller through the programming slot and
can download data at a fast rate. Files downloaded to DataBANK card files are accessible through an Omni
PC Card Drive. The files can then be viewed using the DataLINE software.

c. Communications Interface Module

The communications interface module is a slave module, which allows communication with a master central
monitoring station. The module will respond to communication and return information over the main power line.
With a communications interface module installed, all functions and selectable features that are accessible
at the unit may be performed at the master station. Retrieval of all DataCORDER reports may also be per-
formed. Refer to the master system technical manual for further information.

4.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment

Sustained cold temperature has been employed as an effective postharvest method for the control of Mediterra-
nean and certain other tropical fruit flies. Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2°C (36°F) or below for
specific periods results in the mortality of the various stages of this group of insects.
In response to the demand to replace fumigation with this environmentally sound process, Carrier has inte-
grated Cold Treatment capability into its microprocessor system. These units have the ability to maintain supply
air temperature within one quarter degree Celsius of set point and record minute changes in product tempera-
ture within the DataCORDER memory, thus meeting USDA criteria. Information on USDA is provided in the fol-
lowing sub-paragraphs.

T-365 4–22
 a. USDA Recording
A special type of recording is used for USDA cold treatment purposes. Cold treatment recording requires
three remote temperature probes be placed at prescribed locations in the cargo. Provision is made to con-
nect these probes to the DataCORDER via receptacles located at the rear left-hand side of the unit. Four or
five receptacles are provided. The four 3-pin receptacles are for the probes. The 5-pin receptacle is the rear
connection for the Interrogator. The probe receptacles are sized to accept plugs with tricam coupling locking
devices. A label on the back panel of the unit shows which receptacle is used for each probe.
The standard DataCORDER report displays the supply and return air temperatures. The cold treatment
report displays USDA #1, #2, #3 and the supply and return air temperatures. Cold treatment recording is
backed up by a battery so recording can continue if AC power is lost.

b. USDA/ Message Trip Comment

A special feature in DataLINE allows the user to enter a USDA (or other) message in the header of a data
report. The maximum message length is 78 characters. Only one message will be recorded per day.

4.8.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure

The following is a summary of the steps required to initiate a USDA Cold Treatment:

a. Calibrate the three USDA probes by ice bathing the probes and performing the calibration function with the
DataLINE. This calibration procedure determines the probe offsets and stores them in the controller for use
in generating the cold treatment report. Refer to the Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for more details.

b. Pre-cool the container to the treatment temperature or below.

c. Install the DataCORDER module battery pack (if not already installed).

d. Place the three probes. The probes are placed into the pulp of the product (at the locations defined in the fol-
lowing table) as the product is loaded.

Sensor 1 Place in pulp of the product located next to the return air intake.
Sensor 2 Place in pulp of the product five feet from the end of the load for 40 foot containers,
or three feet from the end of the load for 20 foot containers. This probe should be
placed in a center carton at one-half the height of the load.
Sensor 3 Place in pulp of product five feet from the end of the load for 40 foot containers or
three feet from the end of the load for 20 foot containers. This probe should be placed
in a carton at a side wall at one-half the height of the load.

e. To initiate USDA recording, connect the personal computer and perform the configuration as follows, using
the DataLINE software:

1. Enter ISO header information.

2. Enter a trip comment if desired.

3. Configure the DataCORDER for five probes (s, r, P1, P2, P3) (dcf02=5).

4. Configure the logging interval for one hour.

5. Set the sensor configuration to “USDA.”

6. Configure for two byte memory storage format (dcf04=LONG).

7. Perform a “trip start.”

4.8.13 DataCORDER Alarms

The alarm display is an independent DataCORDER function. If an operating parameter is outside of the expected
range or a component does not return the correct values to the DataCORDER, an alarm is generated. The Data-
CORDER contains a buffer of up to eight alarms. A listing of the DataCORDER alarms is provided in Table 4–7.
Refer to Section 4.8.7 for configuration information.

4–23 T-365
To display alarm codes:

1. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys. This accesses the Data-
CORDER Alarm List Display Mode, which displays any alarms stored in the alarm queue.

2. To scroll to the end of the alarm list, press the UP ARROW. Depressing the DOWN ARROW key will scroll
the list backward.

3. The left display will show “AL#” where # is the alarms number in the queue. The right display will show
“AA##,” if the alarm is active, where ## is the alarm number. “IA##,” will show if the alarm is inactive.
4. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active. “CLEAr” is displayed if all the
alarms in the list are inactive.
5. If no alarms are active, the alarm queue may be cleared. The exception to this rule is the DataCORDER
alarm queue Full alarm (AL91), which does not have to be inactive in order to clear the alarm list.

To clear the alarm list:

1. Press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys.

2. Press the UP/DOWN ARROW key until “CLEAr” is displayed.
3. Press the ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.
4. Press the ALARM LIST key. “AL” will show on the left display and “-----” on the right display when there are
no alarms in the list.
5. Upon clearing of the alarm queue, the alarm light will be turned off.

4.8.14 ISO Trip Header

DataLINE provides the user with an interface to view/modify current settings of the ISO trip header through the ISO
Trip Header screen.
The ISO Trip Header screen is displayed when the user clicks on the “ISO Trip Header” button in the “Trip Func-
tions” Group Box on the System Tools screen.
F9 function - Provides the user with a shortcut for manually triggering the refresh operation. Before sending modi-
fied parameter values, the user must ensure that a successful connection is established with the controller.
If the connection is established with the DataCORDER, the current contents of the ISO Trip Header from the Data-
CORDER will be displayed in each field. If the connection is not established with the DataCORDER, all fields on
the screen will be displayed as “Xs.” If at any time during the display of the ISO Trip Header screen the connection
is not established or is lost, the user is alerted to the status of the connection.
After modifying the values and ensuring a successful connection has been made with the DataCORDER, click on
the “Send” button to send the modified parameter values.
The maximum allowed length of the ISO Trip Header is 128 characters. If the user tries to refresh the screen or
close the utility without sending the changes made on the screen to the DataCORDER, the user is alerted with a
message.

4.9 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES

NOTICE
Configuration numbers with an “ * ” must be changed to the bold option for a default controller
to operate on a PrimeLINE Edge Unit.

Configuration numbers with a bold option should be changed for a default controller to oper-
ate on a PrimeLINE Edge Unit.

T-365 4–24
 Table 4–2 Controller Configuration Variables
CONFIG. # TITLE DEFAULT OPTION
CnF02 Evaporator Fan Speed dS (Dual) SS (Single)
CnF03 Control Temperature Sensors FOUr duAL
CnF04 Enable Dehumidification On OFF
CnF06 * Variable Speed Condenser Fan OFF On
CnF08 Evaporator Motor Type 1Ph 3Ph
CnF09 Refrigerant Selection r134a r744
CnF11 Defrost “Off” Selection noOFF OFF
CnF15 Enable Discharge Temperature Sensor Out In
CnF17 Enable Discharge Pressure Transducer Out (No) In (Yes)
CnF18 Heater Type Old (Low Watt) nEW (High Watt)
CnF20 Enable Suction Pressure Transducer Out (No) In (Yes)
CnF22 Economy Mode OFF Std, Full
CnF23 Enable Defrost Interval Save noSAv SAv
CnF24 Enable Long Pre-trip Test Series Auto Auto2, Auto 3
CnF25 Enable Pre-trip Data Recording rSLtS dAtA
CnF26 Heat Lockout Temperature Set to -10C Set to -5C
CnF27 Enable Suction Temperature Sensor Out In
CnF28 Enable Bulb Mode NOr bULb
CnF31 Probe Check SPEC Std
CnF33 Enable Snap Freeze OFF SnAP
CnF34 Temperature Unit Display bOth F
CnF41 Enable Low DTT Setting Out In
CnF44 Autoslide Enable Out LO, UP
CnF45 Low Humidity Enabled Out In
CnF47 Vent Position OFF UP, LOW, CUStOM
CnF49 OEM Reset Option OFF 0-off,1-std, 2-spec,3-cust
CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface 0-out 1-in
CnF51 Timed Defrost Disable 0-out 1-in
CnF52 Oil Return Algorithm 0-out 1-in
CnF53 Water Cool Oil Return Logic 0-out 1-in
CnF57 * PWM Compressor Control 0-out 1-in, 3 = DLV/DUV
CnF58 * Condenser Motor Type 0-1Phase C 1-3Phase C
CnF59 Electronic Evaporator Expansion Valve 0-none 1-EC, 2-KE, 3- NA
CnF61 ACT ASC Control Enable 0-out 1-in
CnF62 Extended Temperature Control Enable 0-out 1-in
CnF63 CCPC Pre-trip/Trip Start Default State 0-on 1-off
Note: Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading T-365
3-20 configuration software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by the controller programming.

4–25 T-365
 Table 4–2 Controller Configuration Variables (Continued)
CONFIG. # TITLE DEFAULT OPTION
CnF64 Enable Fan Pulsing Logic 0-in 1-out
CnF66 High Speed Evaporator Fan Option 0-off 1-on
CnF67 Air Heaters 0-out 1-in
CnF68 Enable Default Pulsing Temperature 0-out 1-in
CnF70 Enable XtendFRESH Logic 0-out 1-in
CnF71 XtendFRESH Pretrip/Trip Start Default State OFF On
CnF72 Enhance Economy Mode OFF On
CnF73 Custom Defrost Mode 0-out 1-in
Note: Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading T-365
3-20 configuration software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by the controller programming.

4.10 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES

Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes

CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION

NOTICE
If the function is not applicable, the display will read “-----”
Display Only Functions - Cd01 through Cd26 are display only functions.
Display Only Functions
Cd01 Digital Unloader Valve Displays the DUV percent closed. The right display reads 100% when
Closed (%) the valve is fully closed. The valve will usually be at 10% on start up of
the unit except in very high ambient temperatures.
Cd03 Compressor Motor Current The current sensor measures current draw in lines L1 & L2 by all of the
high voltage components. It also measures current draw in compres-
sor motor leg T3. The compressor leg T3 current is displayed.
Cd04 Line Current, The current sensor measures current on two legs. The third unmea-
Phase A sured leg is calculated based on a current algorithm. The current mea-
sured is used for control and diagnostic purposes. For control
Cd05 Line Current, processing, the highest of the Phase A and B current values is used for
Phase B current limiting purposes. For diagnostic processing, the current draws
are used to monitor component energization. Whenever a heater or a
Cd06 Line Current, motor is turned ON or OFF, the current draw increase/reduction for that
Phase C activity is measured. The current draw is then tested to determine if it
falls within the expected range of values for the component. Failure of
this test will result in a Pre-trip failure or a control alarm indication.
Cd07 Main Power Voltage The main supply voltage is displayed.
Cd08 Main Power Frequency The value of the main power frequency is displayed in Hertz. The fre-
quency displayed will be halved if either fuse F1 or F2 is bad (alarm
code AL21).
Cd09 Ambient Temperature The ambient sensor reading is displayed.
Cd10 Evaporator Temperature Evaporator temperature sensor reading is shown on the right display.
Sensor
Cd11 Compressor Discharge Tem- Compressor discharge temperature sensor reading, using compressor
perature dome temperature, is displayed.

T-365 4–26
 Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION
Cd12 Compressor Suction Pres- Reading for evaporator pressure transducer (EPT) is shown on the left
sure display; Press ENTER at Cd12 to show reading for compressor suc-
tion port pressure on right display.
Cd14 Compressor Discharge Pres- Compressor discharges pressure transducer reading is displayed.
sure
Cd15 Digital Unloader Valve The status of the valve is displayed (Open - Closed).
Cd16 Compressor Motor Hour Me- This code displays the compressor motor hours. User can view unit
ter/Unit Run Time Hour Meter run time by pressing the ENTER key while in Cd16. Total hours are re-
corded in increments of 10 hours (i.e., 3000 hours is displayed as 300).
The Compressor Motor Hour Meter display can be reset to 0 by press-
ing and holding the ENTER key for 5 seconds. The Unit Run Time
Hour Meter cannot be reset.
Cd17 Relative Humidity % Humidity sensor reading is displayed. This code displays the relative
humidity, as a percent value.
Cd18 Software Revision # The software revision number is displayed.
Cd19 Battery Check This code checks the Controller/DataCORDER battery pack. While the
test is running, “btest” will flash on the right display, followed by the re-
sult. “PASS” will be displayed for battery voltages greater than 7.0 volts.
“FAIL” will be displayed for battery voltages between 4.5 and 7.0 volts,
and “-----” will be displayed for battery voltages less than 4.5 volts. After
the result is displayed for four seconds, “btest” will again be displayed,
and the user may continue to scroll through the various codes.
Cd20 Config/Model # This code indicates the dash number of the model for which the Con-
troller is configured (i.e., if the unit is a 69NT40-551-100, the display
will show “51100”). To display controller configuration database infor-
mation, press ENTER. Values in “CFYYMMDD” format are displayed
if the controller was configured with a configuration card or with a valid
OEM serial port configuration update; YYMMDD represents the publi-
cation date of the model configuration database.
Cd21 Capacity Mode The mode of operation is displayed (Unloaded - Standard - Econo-
mized).
Cd22 Compressor State The status of the compressor is displayed (OFF, On).
Cd23 Evaporator Fan Displays the current evaporator fan state (OFF, LOW, HIGH).
Cd25 Compressor Run Time Re- This code displays the time remaining until the unit goes into defrost
maining Until Defrost (in tenths of an hour). This value is based on the actual accumulated
compressor running time.
Cd26 Defrost Temperature Sensor Defrost temperature sensor reading is displayed.
Reading

4–27 T-365
 Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION
Configurable Functions

NOTICE
Function codes Cd27 through Cd37 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the
value of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd27 Defrost Interval (Hours or Au- This is the desired period of time between defrost cycles. Factory de-
tomatic) fault is 3 hours. Refer to Section 4.3.20 for information on Defrost In-
terval.
CnF11 determines whether the operator will be allowed to chose
“OFF” as a defrost interval option.
CnF64 determines whether the operator will be allowed to choose
“PuLS” as a defrost interval option. For units operating with “PuLS” se-
lected, defrost interval is determined by the unit temperature setpoint
and the Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting (Cd60). When
the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or less than the Evaporator
Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is set to 6 hours.
Otherwise, the defrost interval is determined using the Automatic De-
frost Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains dis-
played in this function select code.
After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Inter-
val is used until the next defrost termination, the next time the DTT
contacts are OPEN, or the next time power to the control is interrupted.
If the previous value or the new value is “OFF”, the newly selected val-
ue will be used immediately.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to ’AUTO’ un-
less CnF49 (OEM Reset) is set to “Custom” AND CnF64 (Evaporator
Fan Pulsing Logic) configuration variable is set to IN, in which case
Cd27 will be set to “PuLS”.
Cd28 Temperature Units (Degrees This code determines the temperature units (C or F) that will be used for
C or Degrees F) all temperature displays. The user selects C or F by selecting function
code Cd28 and pushing the ENTER key. The factory default value is
Celsius units. This function code will display “-----“ if CnF34 is set to F.
Cd29 Failure Action (Mode) If all of the control sensors are out of range (alarm code AL26) or there
is a probe circuit calibration failure (alarm code AL27), the unit will en-
ter the shutdown state defined by this setting. The user selects one of
four possible actions as follows:
A - Full Cooling (Compressor is on, economized operation.)
b - Partial Cooling (Compressor is on, standard operation.)
C - Evaporator Fan Only (Evaporator fans on high speed, not applica-
ble with frozen set points.)
d - Full System Shutdown - Factory Default (Shut down every compo-
nent in the unit.)

T-365 4–28
 Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION
Cd30 IIn-Range Tolerance The in-range tolerance will determine the temperature band around
the set point which will be designated as in-range. For normal tem-
perature control, control temperature is considered in range if it is with-
in setpoint in-range Tolerance. There are four possible values:
1 = +/- 0.5°C (+/-0.9°F)
2 = +/- 1.0°C (+/-1.8°°F)
3 = +/- 1.5°C (+/-2.7°F)
4 = +/- 2.0°C (+/-3.6°F) - Factory Default
If the control temperature is in-range, the green IN-RANGE light will be
illuminated.
In-range tolerance shall be set to +/- 2.0°C upon activation of dehumid-
ification or bulb mode (Cd33, Cd35, Cd48).
When CCPC is actively controlling, in-range tolerance is not consid-
ered.
“-----“ will be displayed whenever Dehumidification or Bulb mode is en-
abled or when CCPC with six hour re-activation is actively controlling.
“-----“ will be displayed whenever Frozen Economy Mode is operating.
Cd31 Stagger Start Offset Time The stagger start offset time is the amount of time that the unit will de-
(Seconds) lay at start-up, thus allowing multiple units to stagger their control initi-
ation when all units are powered up together. The eight possible offset
values are 0 (Factory Default), 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 or 21 seconds.
Cd32 Current Limit (Amperes) The current limit is the maximum current draw allowed on any phase
at any time. Limiting the unit’s current reduces the load on the main
power supply. When desirable, the limit can be lowered. Note, howev-
er, that capacity is also reduced. The five values for 460 VAC opera-
tion are: 15, 17, 19, 21, or 23 amperes. The factory default setting is
21 amperes.
Cd33 Humidity Setpoint This is the value in percent to which the system will dehumidify or hu-
midify. There are configuration variables that determine whether dehu-
midification/humidification capabilities are installed. In the test mode,
the setpoint will be temporarily set to 1%, allowing the test of dehumid-
ification. After 5 minutes, the normal setpoint is restored.
If unit is configured for HUMIDIFICATION MODE then selection of a
setpoint greater than 75% will activate humidification, and a setpoint
less than or equal to 75% will activate dehumidification. If the unit is
configured for dehumidification only, then the entire setpoint range will
apply to dehumidification. If Pretrip is initiated, this value will be set to
“OFF” automatically.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface
is active.)
Cd34 Economy Mode (On-Off) The current state of the economy mode option, “-----”, On, or Off. CnF22
determines whether economy mode offered. Economy mode is a user
selectable mode of operation provided for power saving purposes.

4–29 T-365
 Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION
Cd35 Bulb Mode The current state of the bulb mode option, “-----”, nOr, or bULb. (Re-
placed by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.) Bulb mode
is an extension of dehumidification control (Cd33). If dehumidification
(CnF04) is set to “Off,” Cd35 will display “Nor” and the user will be un-
able to change it. CnF28 determines whether the bulb mode selection
is offered. After a dehumidification set point has been selected and en-
tered for code Cd33, the user may then change Cd35 to “bulb.” After
Bulb Mode has been selected and entered, the user may then utilize
function codes Cd36 and Cd37 to make the desired changes.
Cd36 Evaporator Fan Speed Select This is the desired evaporator fan speed for use during the bulb Dehu-
midification and Humidification mode option.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
This code is enabled only if in the dehumidification mode (Cd33) and
bulb mode (Cd35) has been set to “bulb.” If these conditions are not
met, “alt” will be displayed (indicating that the evaporator fans will al-
ternate their speed) and the display cannot be changed.
If a dehumidification set point has been selected along with bulb mode
then “alt” may be selected for alternating speed, “Lo” for low speed
evaporator fan only, or “Hi” for high speed evaporator fan only.
If a setting other than “alt” has been selected and bulb mode is deac-
tivated in any manner, then selection reverts back to “alt.”
Cd37 Variable DTT Setting (Bulb This is the variable defrost termination thermostat setting to be used
Mode) with the optional bulb mode functionality. This item is only displayed if
the bulb mode option is configured on.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface
is active.)
Display Only Functions - Cd38 through Cd40 are display only functions.
Cd38 Secondary Supply Tempera- Cd38 will display the current supply recorder sensor (SRS) reading for
ture Sensor units configured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a Data-
CORDER, Cd38 will display “-----.” If the DataCORDER suffers a fail-
ure, (AL55) Cd38 will display the supply recorder sensor reading.
Cd39 Secondary Return Tempera- Cd39 will display the current return recorder sensor (RRS) reading for
ture Sensor units configured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a Data-
CORDER, Cd39 will display “-----.” If the DataCORDER suffers a fail-
ure, (AL55) Cd39 will display the return recorder sensor reading.
Cd40 Container Identification Num- If a valid container id exists, the default display for Cd40 will be
ber “cd40_XXXXX” where “XXXXX” is the 5th character through the 9th
character of the container id. Pressing the Enter key on Cd40 will dis-
play “id_YYYYYYY” where “YYYYYYY” is the 5th character to the 11th
character of the container id.
If no valid container id exists or the container id is blank, the default dis-
play will have Cd40 on the left display and the right display will alter-
nate between “_nEEd” and “___id”. Pressing the enter key while on
Cd40 in the state will prompt the Set Id Interface.
On start up if the container id is not valid, Cd40 will be brought up on
the display for the first minute of power up. This can be left by either
entering a container id or leaving the code select normally.
Cd40 is configured at commissioning to read a valid container identifi-
cation number. The reading will not display alpha characters; only the
numeric portion of the number will display.

T-365 4–30
 Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION
Cd41 Valve Override SERVICE FUNCTION: This code is used for troubleshooting, and al-
lows manual positioning of the economizer solenoid valve, electronic
expansion valve, and digital unloader valve. Provides readings such
as: Percent Capacity, EEV, Capacity Mode, LIV and DUV. Refer to
paragraph 6.21 for operating instructions.

NOTICE
For Units configured for eAutoFresh Cd43 and Cd44 using the following:
Configurable Functions - Cd43 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function
to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd43 eAutoFresh Mode Cd43 is a user selectable mode of operation that allows the opening
and closing of a mechanical air vent door via a stepper motor. These
selection modes are as follows:
OFF - Air makeup vent will remain closed.
USER - Allows for manual selection of the setting.
DELAY -The opening of the door is based on selected time, return
temperature and flow rate (percent opened).
gASLM - The opening is based percent open and CO2 and O2 select-
able limits (LM). This selection is only active if the unit has a CO2 sensor.
TEST / CAL (CO2 sensor option units only) - The door will fully open
and close to allow the user to inspect its operation. If CAL is selected,
the controller will zero calibrate the CO2 sensor input.
If the unit is not configured with AutoFresh, the Cd43 will display “----”
Refer to Section 5.4.3 for description of operational parameters.
Display Only Function - Cd44 is a display only function.
Cd44 eAutoFresh Values / CO2 Code Cd44 displays the eAutoFresh CO2 and O2 values (CO2 and O2)
Sensor Status and CO2 and O2 limits (CO2 LIM and O2 LIM), respectively.
This function code will be dashed out if not configured for eAutoFresh.
This function code will be dashed if CO2 sensor is not detected, and a
sensor is not expected (didn’t have one previously).
This function code will display “ChECK” if a CO2 sensor has not been
auto-detected at the most recent power-up and was detected at a pre-
vious power-up. If “ChECK” is displayed and the ENTER key is
pressed, “SEnSr” is displayed with the choices of “YES” and “no”:
“YES” – sensor should be remembered as detected (present)
“no” – sensor should not be remembered as being detected (not present)

NOTICE
For Units configured for XtendFRESH Cd43 and Cd44 using the following:
Configurable Functions - Cd43 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function
to meet the operational needs of the container.

4–31 T-365
 Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION
Cd43 XtendFresh Mode Cd43 is a user selectable mode of operation that allows the opening
and closing of an air vent door and CO2 scrubber unit. These selection
modes are as follows:
OFF - Vent will remain closed and scrubber will remain off.
XTEND - The opening of the vent and activation of the scrubber will be
controlled based upon CO2 and O2 concentration values and select-
able set points. This selection is only active if the unit has a CO2 or O2
sensor.
TEST - Selecting “TEST” will open/close the vent and activate/deacti-
vate the scrubber to allow the user to confirm operation. If “CAL” is se-
lected, the controller will provide options for zero calibration of the CO2
sensor input and span calibration of the O2 sensor input.
If the unit is not configured for XtendFRESH or eAutoFresh, the Cd43
will display “−−−−”.
Refer to section 4.6.1 for description of operational parameters.
Display Only Function - Cd44 is a display only function.
Cd44 XtendFRESH Values / CO2 If a user presses Enter, the CO2 value will be displayed. Pressing En-
Sensor Status ter again will display the O2 value.
This function code will be dashed out if not configured for Xtend-
FRESH or eAuto-Fresh.
This function code will be dashed if CO2 and O2 sensors are not de-
tected, and sensors are not expected.
Configurable Functions - Cd45 through Cd48 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd45 Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Values: 0 to 240 for UPPER / 0 to 225 for LOWER
Position This function code will be dashed out if not configured for VPS.
When configured for VPS, Cd45 displays the current vent position in
units of 5 CMH (units displayed as “CM”) or CFM (units displayed as
“CF”) depending on the selection of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28
(Metric/Imperial) or the pressing of the deg C/F key.
Cd45 will display whenever the control detects movement via the sen-
sor unless AL50 is active. Cd45 will display for 30 seconds, then time
out and return to the normal display mode.
Cd46 Airflow Display Units Selects the airflow units to be displayed by Cd45 if configured for Vent
Position Sensor or displayed by “USER/FLO” under Cd43 if configured
for Autoslide.
CF= Cubic Feet per Minute
CM=Cubic Meters per Hour
bOth=Displays CF or CM depending on the setting of Cd28 (Metric/Im-
perial) or the pressing of the degree C/F key.
Cd47 Variable Economy Tempera- Used when Economy Mode (CnF22) is set to 3-cust. Display will show
ture Setting “----” when the unit is not configured for Economy Mode.
When the unit has a perishable setpoint and Economy Mode is active,
at the start of each cooling or heating cycle, high speed evaporator
fans will run for 3 minutes. After three minutes, the evaporator fans will
be switched to low speed any time that the supply temperature is with-
in +/- 0.25C of the setpoint and the return temperature is less than or
equal to the supply temperature + the user selected Cd47 (values are
0.5 C - 4.0 C, default is 3.0 C).

T-365 4–32
 Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION
Cd48 Dehumidification / Bulb Car- Initially Cd48 will display current dehumidification-mode; bUlb - bulb
go Mode Parameter Selec- cargo mode, dEhUM - normal dehumidification, or OFF - off. This dis-
tion play is steady.
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of
parameter selection menus (mode, setpoint, evaporator speed, DTT
setting). Pressing ENTER key in any parameter selection menu com-
mits to selection of the currently displayed parameter and causes the
interface to descend into the next parameter selection menu. All pa-
rameter selection menus alternate between a blank display and the
current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current
selection activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection
menu (or to Cd48 display mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface
reverts to normal system display and the current selection menu is
canceled, but any previously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configu-
ration options and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Whenever any pretrip test is initiated, dehumidification-mode goes to
OFF.
Whenever dehumidification-mode goes to OFF:
• Dehumidification control setpoint goes to 0% RH internally but
will then initialize to 95% RH when dehumidification-mode
leaves OFF.
• Evaporator speed select goes to Alt for units without PWM Com-
pressor Control (Cnf57 = Out), Evaporator speed select goes to
Hi for units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In).
• DTT setting goes to 25.6°C or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to bUlb, DTT setting goes to
18.0°C if it had been set higher.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to dEhUM, DTT setting goes
to 25.6°C or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
For units without PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = Out):
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set below 65%
RH evaporator speed select goes to LO if it had been set to Hi.
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set above 64%
RH evaporator speed select goes to Alt if it had been set to LO.
For units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In):
• - Whenever dehumidification control set point is set below 60%
RH, the evaporator fan speed is set to LO, the user has the
ability to set the evaporator fan speed to Hi via the keypad.
• - Whenever dehumidification control set point is set equal to or
above 60% RH, the evaporator fan speed is set to Hi, the user
has the ability to set the evaporator fan speed to LO via the
keypad.
Display Only Function - Cd49 is a display only function.
Cd49 Days Since Last Successful Displays the number of days since last successful pretrip sequence.
Pre-trip Press ENTER to view the number of days since the last successful
pretrip for Auto1, Auto2, and Auto2 in sequence.
Press CODE SELECT to step back through the list and ultimately to
exit the Cd49 display.

4–33 T-365
 Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION
Configurable Functions - Cd50 through Cd53 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd50 CCPC Disabled ”OFF” = disabled.
”On” = enabled.
”SEtPt” = suspended by setpoint too low.
”CAHUM” = suspended by CA or humidity control.
”ACt” = suspended by ACT active.
”FAIL” = all return temperature probe failure for CCPC.
”PrtrP” = pretrip active.
”C LIM” = suspended by cool limit logic.
”PULL” = pulldown active.
“ALArM ” = suspended by shutdown alarm
Press enter, arrow keys, and then enter to select ”OFF” or ”On”.
If ”On” is selected, CCPC operation may be suspended as indicated
by one of the suspension codes listed above. If CCPC is not ”OFF” and
is not suspended, ”On” will be displayed.
Cd51 Automatic Cold Treatment ACT-mode:
Parameter Selection Cd51 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ACT has completed
“ACt” value “On” “OFF” or “----“Display /Select: default “OFF“
“trEAt” value C / F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default
“0.0C“
“DAyS” value “0 – 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “0“
“ProbE” value Probe positions ex ’1 2 _ 4’ ’1 _ 3 _’ Display: default “---- “
“SPnEW” value C / F on 0.1 increments Display/Select: default
“10.0C “
Initially Cd51 will display current countdown timer increments of (1
day)_(1hr), default“0_0
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of
parameter selection menus (act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting).
Pressing ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus com-
mits to selection of the currently displayed parameter and causes the
interface to descend into the next parameter selection menu. All
parameter selection menus alternate between a blank display and the
current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current
selection activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection
menu (or to Cd51 display mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface
reverts to normal system display and the current selection menu is
cancelled, but any previously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configu-
ration options and previously selected parameters as indicated
above.
Parameter with the exception of “Act” may not be altered if Cd51 is re-
entered if “Act” is “On”. When ACT has completed including reaching
the new setpoint “done” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of
completion on the right display will be displayed as the second entry
in the menu. Turning ACT off clears this entry. This action also resets
Cd51 to initial time remaining. ACT must then be turned on to view or
modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto Pre-trip test or Trip Start is initiated, ACT mode
goes to OFF.

T-365 4–34
 Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION
Cd53 Automatic Set point Change ASC-mode:
Mode Parameter Selection Cd53 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ASC has completed
“ASC” value “On” “OFF” Display /Select: default “OFF“
“nSC” value “1 - 6“ (This is the value “n” for the subsequent entries).
“SP (n-1)” value C / F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select:
default
“10.0C“
“DAY (n-1)” value “1 – 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “1“
“SP (n)” value C / F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default
“10.0C
Initially Cd53 will display current count down timer increments of (1
day)_(1hr), default “0_0
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of
parameter selection menus, (mode, act, treat, days, probe and spnew
setting). Pressing ENTER key in any of the parameter selection
menus selects the currently displayed parameter and causes the
interface to descend into the next parameter
selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a
blank display and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current
selection activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection
menu (or to Cd53 display mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface
reverts to normal system display and the current selection menu is
cancelled, but any previously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configu-
ration options and previously selected parameters as indicated
above.
Parameter with the exception of “ASC” may not be altered if Cd53 is
re-entered if “ASC” is “On”. When ASC has completed including
reaching the last setpoint “done” on the left display and the MONTH
DAY of completion on the right display will be displayed as the sec-
ond entry in the menu. Turning ASC off clears this entry. This action
also resets Cd53 to initial time remaining. ASC must then be turned
on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto pretrip test or Trip Start is initiated, ASC mode
goes to OFF.
Display Only Functions - Cd54 through Cd58 are display only functions.
Cd54 Suction Port Superheat / Reading for evaporator superheat (suction temperature minus suction
Electronic Expansion Valve saturation temperature as calculated from suction pressure) is shown
Status on the right display.
Press ENTER at Cd54 to show reading for EEV position (in %) on left
display.
Cd55 Discharge Superheat Cd55 will display discharge superheat (discharge temperature minus
discharge saturation temperature as calculated from discharge pres-
sure) values in C /F as calculated by the discharge temperature
minus the discharge saturation temperature as calculated from dis-
charge pressure. “-----” will be displayed if selection is not valid.

4–35 T-365
 Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION
Cd58 Water Pressure Switch / Con- Cd58 will display “CLOSE” if the WPS or CFS switch contacts are
denser Fan Switch State or closed or if these options are not installed. “OPEn” is displayed when
Override Logic State the WPS or CFS switch contacts are open. When the WPS/CFS
Override Logic is “TRUE”, the right display will flash on all units.
NOTE:
1. This CLOSE/OPEn state displayed in this Code Select function
only applies to units that have the ability to detect the state of a
WPS/CFS. This function should not be relied upon to display
the condition of the switch on units that don’t have a WPS/CFS
switch connected to ECG2 exclusively.
2. The right display will flash if the WPS/CFS Override Logic is
TRUE on all units. This is always the case, whether the unit
has a WPS or CFS installed or not.
3. The ability of the WPS/CFS Override Logic to control the con-
denser fan is limited. It is not possible for this logic to control
the fan on units that have the WPS or CFS wired in series with
the fan contactor. Units wired in this configuration can indicate
that the WPS/CFS Override Logic is active by flashing the right
display, however, the wiring will not allow for control of the con-
denser fan.
Configurable Functions - Cd59 through Cd61 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd59 Pump Down Logic Cd59 allows operation of the pump down logic control. The display
will flash between “STArT PdN” and “PrESS EnTEr”.
Upon entering Cd59 the operator will be required to acknowledge that
they want to initiate the pump down control. The display will flash
between “STArT P dN” and “PrESS EnTEr”. Once the decision to
continue is confirmed pump down logic will begin, and will take com-
plete control of the unit until pump down either succeeds or fails. This
operation can not be halted once it begins without power cycling the
unit.
After pump down logic has been initiated, the operator will be notified
to close the Liquid Line Valve, the display will flash between “CLOSE
LLV” and “PrESS EnTEr”. Once complete the display will read “P dN”
to the left, and the current suction pressure to the right.
If the automatic pump down logic succeeds within 20 minutes, the unit
will turn itself off, and the display will notify the operator that pump
down is complete by flashing between “P dN DOnE” and “SHUT
OFF”. The operator must then shut off the unit.
If the automatic pump down logic does not complete within 20 min-
utes, the unit will drop out of Cd59 and return to its previous control
condition.
Cd60 Evaporator Fan Pulsing Tem- Cd60 contains a selectable temperature range used to determine the
perature Setting engagement point of the Evaporator Fan Pulsing logic. Default setting
is -18.1°C. The user may change the temperature by pressing enter,
then scrolling to the desired temperature using either arrow key.
Press Enter to accept the change. The temperature setting will be
retained until either a Pretrip or Trip Start is initiated at which time the
temperature will set to the default setting.

T-365 4–36
 Table 4–3 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
CODE # TITLE DESCRIPTION
Cd62 High Speed Evaporator Fan Cd62 is used to force evaporator fan speed to high while temperature
Setting control is being performed in the perishable setpoint range. When set
to “On”, evaporator fans operate in high speed regardless of any
other active option that can control evaporator fan speed.
Following a power cycle, the state of the function select code is
retained at its state prior to the power cycle. If “On”, this function
select code will be set to “OFF” when any trip start occurs or any pre-
trip test is initiated.
Event 99 shall be logged when ever CD62 is Turned ON OR if CD62
state is ON at Mid night. Event 100 shall be logged when ever CD62
is Turned OFF OR if CD62 is dashed out from ON state to OFF state
due to setpoint change to frozen range.
“-----” will be displayed if setpoint is in frozen range OR if Cnf66 is
configured OFF.
Cd63 Enhanced Economy Mode Cd63 is used to enable Enhanced Economy Mode (EEM).
Following a power cycle, the state of the function select code is
retained at its state prior to the power cycle if CNF72 = Default ON
else if Default OFF this will be set to OFF . If “On”, this function select
code will be set to “OFF” when any trip start occurs or any pretrip test
is initiated.
Event 120 shall be logged when ever CD63 is Turned ON OR if CD63
state is ON at Mid night.
“-----” will be displayed if Cnf72 is configured OFF.
Cd64 Alternative Compressor Se- Cd64 is used to allow the use of a standard PrimeLine compressor in
lection PrimeLine w/ Edge a PrimeLine with edge technology unit.
Technology When “Std” is selected The Minimum allowable capacity ratio will be
set to 10%, Standard PrimeLine current limiting logic will be utilized,
the original PrimeLine P6-7 test will be used during PreTrip, and the
DLV will remain de-energized.
“-----” will be displayed if Cnf57 is configured “0” or “1”.

4–37 T-365
 Figure 4.12 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence

Start
Troubleshooting

Unit does No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER

self test? Supply
Section 4.2

Yes

Did
Evaporator No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER
fans start? Supply Section 4.2

Yes

Correct No Install Latest Refer to CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

software Software
version? Revision Section 3.2

Yes

Unit Load correct

configured No Refer to Configuration Software (Variables)
unit Section 3.2.1
correctly? configuration

Yes

See alarm
Active Yes details & Refer to Controller Alarm Indications
Alarms? repair Table 3ï6

No

Pass No Refer to Pre-trip Diagnostics

Pre-trip Correct
inspection? all faults Section 3.7

Yes

Operating No Correct Refer to REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

pressures Refrigerant SERVICE Section 6.3
normal? issue

Yes

Unit OK

T-365 4–38
4.11 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS

AL03 LOSS OF SUPERHEAT CONTROL

Cause: Superheat has remained below 1.66°C (3°F) degrees for five minutes continuously while compres-
sor running. Compressor drawing more than 2.0 amps, compressor pressure ratio is greater than
1.8, and Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) is at 0% open.
Component Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
Troubleshooting Check the operation of the EEV using Cd41.
Corrective Action Replace EEV if defective.

Component Evaporator Temperature Sensor(s) ETS & ETS1.

Troubleshooting Verify accuracy of temperature sensors, refer to Sensor Checkout
Procedure Section 7.25.1.
Corrective Action Replace ETS or ETS1 if defective.

Component Evaporator Fans

Troubleshooting Confirm fans operating properly
Corrective Action Replace fan(s) if defective, refer to EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR
ASSEMBLY Section 7.14.1.

AL05 MANUAL DEFROST SWITCH FAILURE

Cause: Controller has detected continuous Manual Defrost Switch activity for five minutes or more.
Component Keypad Power cycle the unit.
Troubleshooting Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the unit.
Corrective Action If the alarm reappears after 5 minutes replace the keypad.

AL06 KEYPAD OR KEYPAD HARNESS FAIL

Cause: Controller has detected one of the keypad keys is continuously activity.
Component Keypad or Harness
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor
the unit.
Corrective Action If the alarm reappears replace the keypad and harness.

AL07 FRESH AIR VENT OPEN

Cause: The VPS is reading greater than 0 CMH while unit is in frozen mode or XtendFRESH active.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting Manually reposition vent and confirm using Cd45. Refer to VENT PO-
SITION SENSOR SERVICE Section 7.26.
Corrective Action If unable to obtain zero reading, replace defective VPS.
-----

4–39 T-365
AL08 HIGH COMPRESSOR PRESSURE RATIO
Cause: Controller detects discharge pressure to suction pressure ratio is too high.
The controller will attempt to correct the situation by restarting the compressor.
Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD
GAUGE SET
Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

AL10 CO2 SENSOR FAILURE

Cause: Alarm 10 is triggered when the CO2 sensor voltage is operating outside of the 0.9 v to 4.7 v range,
or if the sensor is out of range.
Component This is a display alarm and has no associated failure action.
Troubleshooting Refer to eAutoFresh manual.
Corrective Action The alarm is triggered off when voltage is within operating range.

AL14 PHASE SEQUENCE DETECT FAULT

Cause: Controller is unable to determine the correct phase relationship.
Component N/A
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the unit.

Component Wiring
Troubleshooting Check unit wiring.
Confirm pressure readings during start-up; suction pressure should
decrease and discharge pressure should increase.
Corrective Action Correct wiring.

Component Current Sensor

Troubleshooting Check Cd41, right most digit:
If display is 3 or 4 check compressor / sensor wiring.
If display is 5 the current sensor is defective.
Corrective Action Replace current sensor if defective.

T-365 4–40
AL16 COMPRESSOR CURRENT HIGH
Cause: Compressor current draw is over the calculated maximum for 10 minutes.
Component Current Sensor
Troubleshooting Compare Cd3 to actual measured current at wire T1-T2 or T3 going
to the compressor contactor. If there is a difference, determine
whether this is caused by current sensor or amp clamp tool.
Corrective Action Replace current sensor if defective.

Component Amperage is indeed too high.

Troubleshooting Confirm supply voltage/frequency is within specification and bal-
anced according to Electrical Data Section 3.3.
Corrective Action Correct power supply.

Component Operating Conditions

Troubleshooting Make sure system pressures are relevant to operating conditions.
Corrective Action Check air flow of condenser.
Check Refrigerant charge, refer to REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
SERVICE Section 7.3

Component Monitor Unit

Troubleshooting Alarm is display only the alarm may clear itself during operation
Corrective Action If alarm remains active or is repetitive replace compressor at next
available opportunity, refer to COMPRESSOR Service Section 7.8.

4–41 T-365
AL17 COMPRESSOR PRESSURE DELTA FAULT
Cause: Compressor has attempted to start in both directions and fails to generate sufficient pressure dif-
ferential between SPT and DPT.
Component N/A
Troubleshooting Controller will attempt restart every 20 minutes and deactivate the
alarm if successful.
Corrective Action Resume normal operation.

Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD
GAUGE SET Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate SPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD
GAUGE SET Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace SPT if defective.

Component Monitor unit

Troubleshooting Alarm is display only the alarm may clear itself during operation.
Corrective Action If alarm remains active or is repetitive replace compressor at next
available opportunity.

T-365 4–42
AL18 DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH
Cause: Discharge pressure is over the maximum for 10 minutes within the last hour.
Component Restrictions in the refrigeration system.
Troubleshooting Ensure Liquid Line Service Valve is fully open.
Corrective Action Open Liquid Line Service Valve as needed.

Component Filter Drier

Troubleshooting Check the filter drier, if it is iced up or very cold it indicates that the
filter drier needs replacement.
Corrective Action Replace the filter drier if needed, refer to FILTER DRIER Service
Section 7.12.

Component Condenser Fan

Troubleshooting Check Condenser Fan for proper operation.
Corrective Action Correct as required.

Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD
GAUGE SET Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

Component Non-condensables in the refrigeration system.

Troubleshooting With the unit off allow system to stabilize to ambient temperature.
Check system pressure against PT Chart for 134a, refer to Table 7–
4.
Corrective Action Correct as required, refer to Refrigerant Charge Section 7.7.1.

Component Refrigerant
Troubleshooting Check refrigerant level.
Corrective Action Correct as required, refer to Refrigerant Charge Section 7.7.1.

4–43 T-365
AL19 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH
Cause: Discharge temperature exceeds 135°C (275°F) for 10 minutes within the last hour.
Component Restrictions in the refrigeration system.
Troubleshooting Ensure the Discharge Service Valve is fully open.
Corrective Action Open the Discharge Service Valve as needed.
Troubleshooting Check the unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.

Component Non-condensables in the refrigeration system.

Troubleshooting With the unit off allow system to stabilize to ambient temperature.
Check system pressure against PT Chart for 134a, refer to Table 7–
4.
Corrective Action Correct as required, refer to Refrigerant Charge Table 7.7.1.

Component Additional Alarms such as AL16, AL24.

Troubleshooting Check compressor operation.
Corrective Action If the alarm persists, it may indicate a failing compressor, replace the
compressor, refer to COMPRESSOR Service Section 7.8.

AL20 CONTROL CONTACTOR FUSE (F3)

Cause: Control power fuse (F3A or F3B) is open.
Component Check F3A, if the fuse is open:
Troubleshooting Check PA, PB, CH coils for short to ground, if short is found:
Corrective Action Replace the defective coil.
Replace the fuse.

Component Check F3B, if the fuse is open:

Troubleshooting Check ESV coil resistance at TP7 to TP9, if short to ground, or if re-
sistance is less than 4 ohms, coil is defective.
Check CF, ES, EF, HR coils for short to ground, if short is found, coil
is defective.
Corrective Action Replace the defective coil.
Replace the fuse.

Component Check Voltage at QC1:

Troubleshooting If voltage is present, it indicates a defective microprocessor.
Corrective Action Refer to Controller Service Section 7.24.

T-365 4–44
AL21 CONTROL CIRCUIT FUSE (F1/F2)
Cause: One of the 18 VAC controller fuses (F1/F2) is open. Refer to Cd08.
Component System Sensors
Troubleshooting Check system sensors for short to ground.
Corrective Action Replace defective sensor(s)

Component Wiring
Troubleshooting Check wiring for short to ground.
Corrective Action Repair as needed.

Component Controller
Troubleshooting Controller may have an internal short.
Corrective Action Replace controller, refer to Controller Service Section 7.24.

AL22 EVAPORATOR IP
Cause: Evaporator motor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Evaporator Motor
Troubleshooting Shut down unit, disconnect power, & check Evaporator Motor IP at
plug connection pins 4 & 6.
Corrective Action Replace defective evaporator fan motor, refer to EVAPORATOR
FAN MOTOR Service Section 7.14.

AL23 LOSS OF PHASE B

Cause: Controller fails to detect current draw.
Component Incoming Power
Troubleshooting Check incoming power source.
Corrective Action Correct power source as required.

AL24 COMPRESSOR IP
Cause: Compressor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Compressor
Troubleshooting Shut down unit disconnect power, & check resistance of compressor
windings at contactor T1-T2, T2-T3.
Corrective Action Monitor unit, if alarm remains active or is repetitive replace the com-
pressor at the next available opportunity, refer to COMPRESSOR
Service Section 7.8.

4–45 T-365
AL25 CONDENSER IP
Cause: Condenser fan motor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Insufficient Air Flow
Troubleshooting Shut down unit and check condenser fan for obstructions.
Corrective Action Remove obstructions.

Component Condenser Fan Motor

Troubleshooting Shut down unit, disconnect power, & check Condenser Fan Motor IP
at plug connection pins KB5 & KB3.
Corrective Action Replace defective condenser fan motor, refer to Condenser Fan Mo-
tor Assembly Service Section 7.11.

AL26 ALL SENSORS FAILURE: SUPPLY/RETURN PROBES

Cause: Sensors out of range.
Component All sensors detected as out of range
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5:
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SENSOR Service Section 7.25.

AL27 ANALOG TO DIGITAL ACCURACY FAILURE

Cause: Controller AD converter faulty.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates a defective mi-
croprocessor.
Corrective Action Replace defective microprocessor, refer to Controller Service Sec-
tion 7.24.

T-365 4–46
AL28 LOW SUCTION PRESSURE
Cause: Suction pressure too low for normal operation
Component N/A
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the unit.

Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate SPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD
GAUGE SET Section 7.2
Corrective Action Replace SPT if defective

Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD
GAUGE SET Section 7.2
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective

AL29 AUTOFRESH FAILURE

Cause: Alarm 29 is triggered if CO2 or O2 level is outside of the limit range and the vent position is at 100%
for longer than 90 minutes.
Component Alarm LED will be activated and user intervention is required.
Troubleshooting Refer to eAutoFresh manual.
Corrective Action The alarm is triggered off when atmospheric conditions are within lim-
it settings.

AL50 AIR VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS)

Cause: VPS Sensor out of range.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting Make sure VPS is secure.
Corrective Action Manually tighten panel.

Troubleshooting If the alarm persists, replace the sensor or the assembly.

Corrective Action Replace VPS.

4–47 T-365
AL51 EEPROM FAILURE
Cause: Controller Memory Failure
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Pressing the ENTER key when “CLEAr” is displayed will result in an
attempt to clear the alarm.
Corrective Action If action is successful (all alarms are inactive), alarm 51 will be reset.

Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates defective con-
troller memory.
Corrective Action Replace defective controller, refer to Controller Service Section 7.24

AL52 EEPROM ALARM LIST FULL

Cause: Alarm list queue is full.
Component Active Alarms
Troubleshooting Repair any alarms in the queue that are active. Indicated by “AA”.
Corrective Action Clear alarms, refer to CONTROLLER ALARMS Section 4.6.

AL53 BATTERY PACK FAILURE

Cause: Battery voltage low
Component Battery
Troubleshooting If this alarm occurs on start up, allow a unit fitted with rechargeable
batteries to operate for up to 24 hours to charge rechargeable batter-
ies sufficiently. Once fully charged, the alarm will deactivate.
Corrective Action To clear the alarm press ENTER and ALT simultaneously at the start-
up of Cd19 (Battery Check).
If alarm persists, replace the battery pack, refer to Section 7.24.6
Battery Replacement.

AL54 PRIMARY SUPPLY SENSOR (STS)

Cause: Invalid Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) reading.
Component Supply Temperature Sensor (STS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further action is required.
Corrective Action If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SENSOR Service Section 7.25.

AL56 PRIMARY RETURN SENSOR (RTS)

Cause: Invalid Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) reading.
Component Return Temperature Sensor (RTS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5:
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SENSOR Service Section 7.25.

T-365 4–48
AL57 AMBIENT SENSOR (AMBS)
Cause: Invalid Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS) reading.
Component Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
Troubleshooting Test the AMBS, refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure Section 7.25.1.
Corrective Action Replace AMBS if defective, refer to TEMPERATURE SENSOR Ser-
vice Section 7.25.

AL58 COMPRESSOR HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY (HPS)

Cause: High pressure safety switch remains open for at least one minute.
Component High Pressure Switch (HPS)
Troubleshooting Test the HPS; refer to Checking High Pressure Switch, Section
7.9.1.
Corrective Action Replace HPS if defective, refer to Sensor Replacement, Section
7.25.

Component Refrigeration System

Troubleshooting Check unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.

AL59 HEATER TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (HTT)

Cause: Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) is open.
Component Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT)
Troubleshooting Check for 24 volts at test point TP10, if no voltage at TP10 after unit
has reached set point HTT is open.
Corrective Action Replace HTT if defective, refer to Sensor Replacement Section
7.25.

AL60 DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (DTS)

Cause: Failure of the Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) to open.
Component Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS)
Troubleshooting Test the DTS; refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure Section 7.25.1.
Corrective Action Replace the DTS if defective, refer to Sensor Replacement Section
7.25.

4–49 T-365
AL61 HEATER CURRENT DRAW FAULT
Cause: Improper current draw during heat or defrost mode.
Component Heater(s)
Troubleshooting While in heat or defrost mode, check for proper current draw at heat-
er contactors, refer to ELECTRICAL DATA Section 3.3.
Corrective Action Replace heater(s) if defective, refer to Section 7.13.2 Evaporator
Heater Removal and Replacement.

Component Contactor
Troubleshooting Check voltage at heater contactor on the heater side. If no voltage
present:
Corrective Action Replace heater contactor if defective.

AL63 CURRENT LIMIT

Cause: Unit operating above current limit.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Check unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.
Troubleshooting Check unit for proper operation.
Corrective Action Repair as needed.

Component Power supply

Troubleshooting Confirm supply voltage/frequency is within specification and bal-
anced according to ELECTRICAL DATA Section 3.3.
Corrective Action Correct power supply.

Component Current limit set too low.

Troubleshooting Check current limit setting Code Cd32.
Corrective Action The current limit can be raised (maximum of 23 amps) using Cd32.

AL64 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (CPDS)

Cause: Discharge Temperature sensor out of range.
Component Discharge temperature sensor (CPDS).
Troubleshooting Test the CPDS; refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure, Section
7.25.1.
Corrective Action Replace the CPDS if defective, refer to Sensor Replacement Sec-
tion 7.25.

T-365 4–50
AL65 DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (DPT)
Cause: Compressor Discharge Transducer is out of range.
Component Compressor Discharge Transducer (DPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD
GAUGE SET Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

AL66 (SPT) SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER, (EPT) EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

Cause: Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) out of range.
Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate EPT and SPT pressure readings, refer to MANI-
FOLD GAUGE SET Section 7.2. - Performing a Pre-trip 5-9 test will
also check the transducers.
Corrective Action Replace EPT/SPT if defective.
Troubleshooting Monitor
Corrective Action If the alarm persists, it may indicate a failing compressor, refer to
COMPRESSOR Service Section 7.8.

AL67 HUMIDITY SENSOR

Cause: Humidity Sensor (HS) reading out of range.
Component Humidity Sensor (HS)
Troubleshooting Make sure the humidity sensor is properly connected in the socket.
Corrective Action Make sure the humidity sensor wires have not been damaged.
Monitor, replace HS if alarm persists.

AL69 EVAPORATOR TEMP SENSOR (ETS1)

Cause: Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1) out of range.
Component Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)
Troubleshooting Test the ETS1, refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure Section 7.25.1.
Corrective Action Replace Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1) if defective.

AL70 SECONDARY SUPPLY SENSOR (SRS)

Cause: Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS) is out of range.
Component Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5:
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SENSOR Service Section 7.25.

4–51 T-365
AL71 SECONDARY RETURN SENSOR (RRS)
Cause: Secondary Return Sensor (RRS) is out of range.
Component Secondary Return Sensor (RRS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5:
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SENSOR Service Section 7.25.

AL72 CONTROL TEMP OUT OF RANGE

Cause: After the unit goes in-range for 30 minutes then out of range for a continuous 120 minutes.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Ensure unit is operating correctly.
Corrective Action Power cycle unit.
Control Temperature is in In-range.
Any Pre-trip mode, resets the timers.

NOTICE
If the controller is configured for four probes without a DataCORDER, the DataCORDER alarms
AL70 and AL71 will be processed as Controller alarms AL70 and AL71. Refer to Table 4–7.

ERR# INTERNAL MICROPROCESSOR FAILURE

Cause: The controller performs self-check routines. If an internal failure occurs, an “ERR” alarm will appear
on the display. This is an indication the controller needs to be replaced.
Error Description
ERR 0-RAM failure Indicates that the controller working memory has failed.
ERR 1-Program Memory Indicates a problem with the controller program.
Failure
ERR 2-Watchdog time-out The controller program has entered a mode whereby the controller
program has stopped executing.
ERR 3-N/A N/A
ERR 4-N/A N/A
ERR 5-A-D failure The controller’s Analog to Digital (A-D) converter has failed.
ERR 6-IO Board failure Internal program/update failure.
ERR 7-Controller failure Internal version/firmware incompatible.
ERR 8-DataCORDER failure Internal DataCORDER memory failure.
ERR 9-Controller failure Internal controller memory failure.

T-365 4–52
ERR# INTERNAL MICROPROCESSOR FAILURE
In the event that a failure occurs and the display cannot be updated, the status LED will indicate
the appropriate ERR code using Morse code as shown below.
E R R 0 to 9
ERR0 = . .-. .-. -----
ERR1 = . .-. .-. . ----
ERR2 = . .-. .-. . . ---
ERR3 = . .-. .-. . . . --
ERR4 = . .-. .-. . . . . -
ERR5 = . .-. .-. . . . . .
ERR6 = . .-. .-. -. . . .
ERR7 = . .-. .-. --. . .
ERR8 = . .-. .-. ---. .
ERR9 = . .-. .-. ---- .

ENTR STPT ENTER SET POINT (PRESS ARROW & ENTER)

Cause: The controller is prompting the operator to enter a set point.

LO LOW MAIN VOLTAGE (FUNCTION CODES CD27-38 DISABLED AND NO ALARM STORED.)
Cause: This message will be alternately displayed with the set point whenever the supply voltage is less
than 75% of its proper value.

OLD HARDWARE DOES NOT INCLUDE A TRIAC ON THE KA06 OUTPUT

CNTRL
Cause: ML3 controllers with configuration variable 57 set to ”3” will generate this message.
This message will swap being the number one priority message with the highest priority message
in the list above.

4.12 CONTROLLER PRE-TRIP TEST CODES

Table 4–4 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes

CODE NO. TITLE DESCRIPTION

NOTICE
“Auto” or “Auto1” menu includes the: P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6 and rSLts. “Auto2” menu
includes P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10 and rSLts. “Auto3” menu includes P0, P1,
P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7 and P8.

4–53 T-365
 Table 4–4 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes

CODE NO. TITLE DESCRIPTION

P0-0 Pre-Trip Initiated: Container identifier code, Cd18 Software Revision Number, Cd20 Container
Configuration Dis- Unit Model Number, & configuration database identifier CFMMYYDD are dis-
play, Indicator played in sequence.
Lamps, LEDs, and Next the unit will indicate the presence or non-presence of an RMU according
Displays to whether any RMU inquiry messages have been received since the unit
was booted.
Units equipped with Autoslide Enabled (Cnf44) will cause the vent to seek to
its closed position, followed by two sequences of opening to 100% and re-
turning to the closed position. No other autoslide mode of operation will be
available until the two cycles of opening and closing have completed.
Since the system cannot recognize lights and display failures, there are no
test codes or results associated with this phase of Pretrip. To know if the test
passes the operator must observe that the LCD display elements and the in-
dicator lights behave as described below.

P1 Tests - Heaters Current Draw: Heater is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range. No
other system components will change state during this test.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P1-0 Heaters Turned On Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the
heater is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured again.
The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.

P1-1 Heaters Turned Off Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the
heater is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured again.
The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.

P2 Tests - Condenser Fan Current Draw: Condenser is first verified in low speed then in high speed. Current
draw must fall within specified range. No other system components will change state during this test. If the Water
Pressure Switch is open this test will be skipped.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P2-0 Condenser Fan Condenser fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and con-
High Speed denser fan is then turned on. After 10 seconds the current draw is measured
again. After the current is measured the Condenser fan is turned off and after
10 seconds a second off measurement is taken.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.

P2-1 Condenser Fan Condenser fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and Con-
Low Speed denser low speed fan is then turned on. After 10 seconds the current draw is
measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded. After the cur-
rent is measured the Condenser fan is turned off and after 10 seconds a sec-
ond off measurement is taken.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.

P3 Tests - Low Speed Evaporator Fan Current Draw: The system must be equipped with a low speed evapora-
tor fan, as determined by CnF02, the Evaporator Fan Speed Select configuration variable. Low speed evaporator
fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range. No other system components will change
state during this test

T-365 4–54
 NOTICE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the
start of either test, then the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the
test, then the test will fail upon conclusion of the test.

.
CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P3-0 Low Speed Evapo- High speed evaporator fans will be turned on for 20 seconds, the fans will be
rator Fan Motors turned off for 4 seconds, current draw is measured, and then the low speed
On evaporator fans are turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw is mea-
sured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.

P3-1 Low Speed Evapo- Low speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the current
rator Fan Motors draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Off Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.

P4 Tests - High Speed Evaporator Fans Current Draw: High speed evaporator fans are turned on, then off. Cur-
rent draw must fall within specified range and measured current changes must exceed specified ratios. No other
system components will change state during this test.

NOTICE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the
start of either test, the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test,
the test will fail upon conclusion of the test.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P4-0 High Speed Evap- Evaporator fans start in the off condition, current draw is measured, then high
orator Fan Motors speed evaporator fans will be turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw
On is measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw in the specified range AND measured
current changes exceed specified ratios.
If the three phase motors are configured IN, the change ratio test is skipped.

P4-1 High Speed Evap- High speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the current
orator Fan Motors draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Off Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.

P5 Tests - Air Stream Temperature Sensor Tests: Tests the validity of the Air Stream Temperature Sensors.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P5-0 Supply/Return The High Speed Evaporator Fan is turned on and run for eight minutes, with
Probe Test all other outputs de-energized. A temperature comparison is made between
the return and supply probes.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.

NOTICE
If this test fails, “P5-0” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both
Probe tests (this test and the PRIMARY/ SECONDARY) pass,
display will read “P5” “PASS.”

4–55 T-365
 CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P5-1 Supply Probe Test This test if for units equipped with secondary supply probe only.
The temperature difference between primary supply probe and secondary
supply probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.

NOTICE
If this test fails, “P5-1” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both
Probe tests (this and the SUPPLY/RETURN TEST) pass,
because of the multiple tests, the display will read “P 5”
“PASS.”

P5-2 Return Probe Test For units equipped with secondary return probe only.
The temperature difference between return temperature sensor (RTS) and
return temperature sensor (RRS) probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.

NOTICE
1. If this test fails, “P5-2” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both
Probe tests (this test and the SUPPLY/RETURN) pass,
because of the multiple tests, the display will read “P 5,”
“PASS.”
2. The results of Pre-trip tests 5-0, 5-1 and 5-2 will be used to
activate or clear control probe alarms.

P5-3 Evaporator Fan Di- With evaporator fan running on high speed, measure the temperature differ-
rection Test ence between the primary supply and primary return probes. Turn the heat-
ers on for 60 seconds then measure the temperature difference between the
primary supply and primary return probes for up to 120 additional seconds.
This is a Pass/Fail test. The test passes if differential of STS is 0.25°C higher
than RTS.
Test P5-0 must pass before this test is run.

P5-7 Primary vs Sec- This is a Pass/Fail test of the primary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS1)
ondary Evaporator and secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2).
Temperature Sen- Test passes if secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2) is within +/
sor Test - 0.5°C of the primary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS1).

P5-8 Primary Evapora- This is a Pass/Fail test of the Primary Evaporator Pressure Transducer.
tor Pressure Trans- Test passes if suction pressure transducer (SPT) is within +/- 0 psi of satura-
ducer Test tion pressure at current evaporator temperature. Also passes if SPT is within
+/- 1 psi of discharge pressure 6 hours after a power interruption.
Test P5-7 must pass before this test is run.

P5-9 Suction (Evapora- Units equipped with a secondary Evaporator pressure transducer.
tor) Pressure Test passes if suction pressure transducer (SPT) is within +/- 1.5 psi of the
Transducer Test evaporator pressure transducer (EPT).
Test P5-8 must pass before this test is run.

T-365 4–56
 CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P5-10 Humidity Sensor This is a Pass/Fail/Skip test of the humidity sensor configuration.
Controller Configu- Test passes if the controller configuration has humidity sensor in.
ration Verification
Test fails if the controller configuration has humidity sensor out and Vout is
Test
greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test is skipped if the controller configuration has the humidity sensor out and
Vout is less than 0.20 Volts.
Test P5-9 must pass before this test is run.

P5-11 Humidity Sensor This is a Pass/Fail test of humidity sensor installation (sensor is present).
Installation Verifi- Test passes if Vout is greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
cation Test
Test fails if Vout is less than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test P5-10 must pass before this test is run.

P5-12 Humidity Sensor This is a Pass/Fail test of the Humidity Sensor Range.
Range Check Test Test passes if Vout for the humidity sensor is between 0.33 Volts and 4 Volts.
Test fails if Vout is outside of this range.
Test P5-11 must pass before this test is run.

P6 Tests - Refrigerant Probes, Compressor and Refrigerant Valves: Pass/Fail testing is performed for the
compressor, EEV, DUV, ESV, and the refrigerant pressure and temperature sensors.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P6-0 Discharge Therm- If Alarm 64 is active the test fails. Otherwise, the test passes.
istor Test

P6-1 Suction Thermis- If the Suction Temperature Sensor (CPSS) both is configured ON and is in-
tor Test valid, the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.

P6-2 Discharge Pres- If Alarm 65 is active any time during the first 45 second period, the test fails.
sure Transducer Otherwise, the test passes.
Test

P6-3 Suction Pressure If Alarm 66 is active the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
Transducer Test

P6-4 Compressor Cur- Compressor current is tested before and 10 seconds after start up. If current
rent Draw Test does not increase, the test fails. P6-7 is run at the end of P6-4. If this test fails,
P6-6 is skipped.

P6-5 Compressor Leak Pre-trip P6-5 ensures that the compressor holds pressure. After compressor
Test pump up and pump down, the compressor is turned off for 62 seconds. When
suction side pressure holds (less than 8 psi rise) for 10 seconds, P6-5 pass-
es, otherwise the Compressor Leak Test fails.

NOTICE
P6-6 through P6-10 are conducted by changing status of each valve and comparing suction
pressure change and/or compressor current change with predetermined values. Tests will
cause compressor and condenser fans to cycle on and off as needed to generate the pressure
required for individual Pre-trip sub tests. The compressor will start in order to build discharge
pressure, followed by compressor pump down sequence. At the conclusion of compressor
pump down sequence, the compressor will shut down and the valve test will start.

P6-6 Economizer Valve Passes if suction pressure increases a minimum of 4 psia when the valve
Test opens for 15 seconds.

4–57 T-365
 CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P6-7 Digital Loader/Un- Passes if pressure and current changes are within predetermined values 3
loader Valve Test seconds after DLV/DUV switch signal. If it does not pass then refer to Sec-
tion 7.19

P6-10 Electronic Expan- The test records the suction pressure during the open valve position and
sion Valve Test passes if the suction pressure increase is above 3 psi when the valve opens
for 10 seconds.

NOTICE
P7-0 & P8 are included with “Auto2 & Auto3” only. P9-0 through P10 are included with “Auto2”
only.

P7 Tests - High Pressure Tests: Unit is run at full capacity without condenser fan running to make sure that the
HPS opens and closes properly.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P7-0 High Pressure Test is skipped if sensed ambient temperature is less than 7.2°C (45°F), re-
Switch (HPS) turn air temperature is less than -17.8°C (0°F), or the water pressure switch
Opening Test is open. With the unit running, the condenser fan is turned off and a 900 sec-
ond (15 minute) timer is started. The right display shows Discharge Pressure
if the sensor is configured and valid, else Discharge Temperature. The unit
needs to disable Discharge Pressure limit and enable Current Limit checks.
The test fails immediately if:
-Ambient Temperature Sensor invalid
-Composite Return Temperature Sensor invalid
-HPS is open
The test fails if:
-HPS fails to open before 900 seconds total test time.
-Evaporator or Compressor IP Alarm.
-Calculated Dome Temperature exceeds 137.78°C (280°F).
-Discharge pressure exceeds 370 psig.
-Compressor Current exceeds limits
The test passes if HPS opens within the 15 minute time limit.

P7-1 High Pressure If return temperature greater than -2.4°C, set setpoint to -5.0°C, else set set-
Switch (HPS) Clos- point to -30°C. Restart unit according to normal startup logic. Run unit nor-
ing Test mally for 120 seconds.
The test passes if the high pressure switch closes within 75 seconds after
end of Test 7-0, else the test fails.
Test P7-0 must pass for this test to execute.

T-365 4–58
P8 Tests - Perishable Mode Tests: Pretrip tests P7-0 and P7-1 must have passed or have been skipped for these
tests to execute.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P8-0 Perishable Mode If the control temperature is below 15.6°C., the setpoint is changed to
Test 15.6°C., and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed in
the equivalent of normal heating. If the control temperature is above 15.6°C.
at the start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test 8-1. While
in test 8-0 the right display will show the value of the control temperature.”
The test fails if the 18°0 Minute timer expires before the control temperature
reaches setpoint - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat. There is no
pass display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches setpoint, the
test proceeds to test 8-1.

P8-1 Perishable Mode Control temperature must be at least 15.6°C (60°F).

Pull Down Test / The set point is changed to 0°C (32°F), and a 180-minute timer is started.
eAutoFresh CO2 The left display will read “P8-1,” the right display will show the supply air tem-
Sensor Calibration perature. The unit will then start to pull down the temperature to the 0C set
point.
The test passes if the container temperature reaches set point before the
180-minute timer expires.
On units where the CO2 Sensor Status indicates that a CO2 sensor is pres-
ent, calibration of the CO2 sensor will be attempted during P8-1. Once P8-1
begins, calibration will be attempted when the supply temperature goes be-
low 5°C. If the CO2 sensor voltage reads within the 0.95 <>1.15Vdc range
before the end of P8-1, the sensor will be calibrated by holding the CO2 zero
line low for 4 seconds. Once calibration is performed, the sensor voltage will
be verified to make sure it is in the 0.95 to 1.05 Vdc range. If the voltage is
not within this range, CO2 sensor calibration fails.

P8-2 Perishable Mode Test P8-1 must pass for P8-2 to execute.
Maintain Tempera- A fifteen minute timer is started, and the system will attempt to minimize con-
ture Test trol temperature error (supply temperature minus setpoint) until the timer ex-
pires. The control temperature will be sampled each minute starting at the
beginning of P8-2.
During P8-2, the left display will read “P8-2,” and the right display will show
the supply air temperature.
When the test is completed, the average control temperature error will be
compared to the pass/fail criteria.
Test passes if the average temperature error is within +/- 1.0°C.
Test fails if the average temperature error is greater than +/- 1.0°C, or if the
DataCORDER supply temperature probe is invalid. If the test fails, the control
probe temperature will be recorded as -50.0°C.

P9 Test - DTT Close and Open Test: The DTT in this control is not a physical device, with actual metallic con-
tacts, it is a software function that acts similar to a thermostat. Using various temperature inputs, the DTT function
determines whether a thermostat mounted on the Evaporator Coil would have OPEN or CLOSED contacts. Pri-
marily, the DTT function operates based on the temperature reading from the Defrost Termination Sensor.

4–59 T-365
.
CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P9-0 DTT Closed and P9-0 DTT Closed and Open Test
Open Test During P9-0 the defrost temperature sensor (DTS) reading will be displayed
on the left display. The right display will show the supply air temperature.
The unit will run FULL COOL for 30 minutes maximum until the DTT is con-
sidered closed. This step may not have to be executed. Once the DTT is con-
sidered closed, the unit simulates defrost by running the heaters for up to two
hours, or until the DTT is considered open.
Test fails if:
The DTT is not considered closed after the 30 minutes of full cooling
HTT opens when DTT is considered closed or if return air temperature rises
above 248°C (120°F).
Test passes if the DTT is considered open within the 2 hour heat cycle time
limit.

P10 Tests - Frozen Mode Tests:.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P10-0 Frozen Mode Heat If the container temperature is below 7.2°C, the setpoint is changed to 7.2°C.,
Test and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed in the equiv-
alent of normal heating. If the container temperature is above 7.2°C. at the
start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test 10-1. During this
test, the control temperature will be shown on the right display.
The test fails if the 180 Minute timer expires before the control temperature
reaches setpoint - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat. There is no
pass display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches setpoint, the
test proceeds to test 10-1.

P10-1 Frozen Mode Pull- Control temperature must be at least 7.2°C (45°F) The setpoint is changed
down Test to -17.8°C. The system will then attempt to pull down the control temperature
to setpoint using normal frozen mode cooling. During this test, the control
temperature will be shown on the right display.
The test passes if the control temperature reaches setpoint minus 0.3°C be-
fore the 180 minute timer expires. Otherwise, the test fails. Upon failure and
when initiated by an automatic Pre-trip sequence, P10-1 will auto-repeat
once by starting P10-0 over again.

P10-2 Frozen Mode Test P10-1 must pass for this test to execute.
Maintain Tempera- Same as for test 8-2 except the control temperature is the return probe tem-
ture Test perature.
The average error must be +/-1.6°C. If the DataCORDER supply tempera-
ture probe is invalid, the test fails and the control probe temperature will be
recorded as -50°C. Upon failure and when initiated by an automatic Pre-trip
sequence, P10-2 will auto-repeat by starting P10-0 over again.

T-365 4–60
 Table 4–5 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments

NOTE:
Inapplicable Functions display “-----”

To Access: Press ALT.MODE key then CODE SELECT key

CODE NO. TITLE DESCRIPTION

dC1 Recorder Supply Current reading of the supply recorder sensor.

Temperature

dC2 Recorder Return Current reading of the return recorder sensor.

Temperature

dC3-5 USDA 1,2,3 Tem- Current readings of the three USDA probes.
peratures

dC6-13 Network Data Current values of the network data points (as configured). Data point 1 (Code
Points 1-8 6) is generally the humidity sensor and its value is obtained from the control-
ler once every minute.

dC14 Cargo Probe 4 Current reading of the cargo probe #4.

Temperature

dC15-19 Future Expansion These codes are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.

dC20-24 Temperature Sen- Current calibration offset values for each of the five probes: supply, return,
sors 1-5 Calibra- USDA #1, #2, and #3. These values are entered via the interrogation pro-
tion gram.

dC25 Future Expansion This code is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.

dC26,27 S/N, Left 4, Right 4 The DataCORDER serial number consists of eight characters. Function code
dC26 contains the first four characters. Function code dC27 contains the last
four characters. (This serial number is the same as the controller
serial number.)

dC28 Minimum Days Left An approximation of the number of logging days remaining until the Data-
CORDER starts to overwrite the existing data.

dC29 Days Stored Number of days of data that are currently stored in the DataCORDER.

dC30 Date of Last Trip The date when a Trip Start was initiated by the user. In addition, if the system
start goes without power for seven continuous days or longer, a trip start will au-
tomatically be generated on the next AC power up. Press and hold “ENTER”
key for five seconds to initiate a “Trip Start.”

dC31 Battery Test Re- Shows the current status of the optional battery pack.
sults PASS: Battery pack is fully charged.
FAIL: Battery pack voltage is low.

dC32 Time: Hour, Minute Current time on the real time clock (RTC) in the DataCORDER.

dC33 Date: Month, Day Current date (month and day) on the RTC in the DataCORDER.

dC34 Date: Year Current year on the RTC in the DataCORDER.

dC35 Cargo Probe 4 Cal- Current calibration value for the Cargo Probe. This value is an input via the
ibration interrogation program.

4–61 T-365
 Table 4–6 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records
TEST NO. TITLE DATA
1-0 Heater On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in current for Phase A, B and C
1-1 Heater Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-0 Condenser Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Water pressure switch (WPS) - Open/
Closed, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-1 Condenser Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-0 Low Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-1 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-0 High Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-1 High Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
5-0 Supply/Return Probe Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, RTS, SRS and RRS
5-1 Secondary Supply Probe (SRS) Pass/Fail/Skip
Test
5-2 Secondary Return Probe (RRS) Pass/Fail/Skip
Test
6-0 Discharge Thermistor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-1 Suction Thermistor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-2 Discharge Pressure Sensor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-3 Suction Pressure Sensor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-4 Compressor Current Draw Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-5 Compressor Leak Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-6 Economizer Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-7 Digital Unloader Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-9 Liquid Injection Valve Test (If Pass/Fail/Skip
Equipped)
6-10 Electronic Expansion Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
7-0 High Pressure Switch Closed Pass/Fail/Skip Result, AMBS, DPT or CPT (if equipped) Input
values that component opens
7-1 High Pressure Switch Open Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, DPT or CPT (if equipped) Input val-
ues that component closes
8-0 Perishable Mode Heat Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to heat to 16°C (60°F)
8-1 Perishable Mode Pulldown Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to pull down to 0°C
(32°F)
8-2 Perishable Mode Maintain Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER supply tem-
perature (SRS) over last recording interval.
9-0 Defrost Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, DTS reading at end of test, line voltage,
line frequency, time in defrost.
10-0 Frozen Mode Heat Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time unit is in heat.
10-1 Frozen Mode Pulldown Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time to pull down unit to -17.8°C
(0°F).
10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER return tem-
perature (RRS) over last recording interval.

T-365 4–62
.
Table 4–7 DataCORDER Alarms
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then ALARM LIST key
CODE NO. TITLE DESCRIPTION
dAL70 Recorder Supply Temperature The supply recorder sensor reading is outside of the range
Out of Range of -50°C to 70°C (-58°F to +158°F), or the probe check
logic has determined there is a fault with this sensor.

NOTICE
The P5 Pre-trip test must be run to inacti-
vate the alarm.
dAL71 Recorder Return Temperature The return recorder sensor reading is outside of the range
Out of Range of -50°C to 70°C (-58°F to +158°F), or the probe check
logic has determined there is a fault with this sensor.

NOTICE
The P5 Pre-trip test must be run to inacti-
vate the alarm.
dAL72-74 USDA Temperatures 1, 2, 3 Out The USDA probe temperature reading is outside of -50°C
of Range to 70°C (-58°F to +158°F) range.
dAL75 Cargo Probe 4 Out of Range The cargo probe temperature reading is outside of -50°C
to 70°C (-58°F to +158°F) range.
dAL76, 77 Future Expansion These alarms are for future expansion and are not in use
at this time.
dAL78-85 Network Data Point 1 - 8 Out of The network data point is outside of its specified range.
Range The DataCORDER is configured by default to record the
supply and return recorder sensors. The DataCORDER
may be configured to record up to eight additional network
data points. An alarm number (AL78 to AL85) is assigned
to each configured point. When an alarm occurs, the Data-
CORDER must be interrogated to identify the data point
assigned. When a humidity sensor is installed, it is usually
assigned to AL78.
dAL86 RTC Battery Low The real time clock (RTC) backup battery is too low to ad-
equately maintain the RTC reading.
A real time clock failure is critical to the operation of the
unit. If this alarm occurs, replace the RTC battery at the
next available opportunity. After replacing the battery the
following actions are required:
• Update the RTC setting
• Update the unit’s software configuration
• Update the operational software
• Update all user selectable function code settings
(defrost, setpoint, etc)
dAL87 RTC Failure An invalid time has been detected. Either the DataCORD-
ER run time hour and minute have not changed at the start
of the hour, or the real time clock (RTC) time has gained
or lost more than 2 minutes in the hour. This situation may
be corrected by cycling the power, setting the clock or
meeting the above criteria for an hour.

4–63 T-365
 Table 4–7 DataCORDER Alarms
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then ALARM LIST key
CODE NO. TITLE DESCRIPTION
dAL88 DataCORDER EEPROM Failure A write of critical DataCORDER information to the EE-
PROM has failed.
dAL89 Flash Memory Error Error An error has been detected in the process of writing
daily data to the non-volatile FLASH memory.
dAL90 Future Expansion This alarm is for future expansion, and is not in use at this
time.
dAL91 Alarm List Full The DataCORDER alarm queue is determined to be full
(eight alarms).

T-365 4–64
 SECTION 5
OPERATION
5.1 INSPECTION (BEFORE LOADING)

! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compressor unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.

1. Check inside for the following:

a. Check channels or “T” bar floor for cleanliness. Channels must be free of debris for proper air circulation.

b. Check container panels, insulation and door seals for damage. Effect permanent or temporary repairs.

c. Visually check evaporator fan motor mounting bolts for proper securement (refer to Section 7.14).

d. Check for visible corrosion on the evaporator stator and fan deck (refer to Section 7.15).

e. Check for dirt or grease on evaporator fans or fan deck and clean if necessary.

f. Check evaporator coil for cleanliness or obstructions. Wash with fresh water (refer to Section 7.15).

g. Check defrost drain pans and drain lines for obstructions and clear if necessary. Wash with fresh water.

h. Check panels on refrigeration unit for loose bolts and condition of panels. Make sure T.I.R. devices are in
place on access panels.

2. Check condenser coil for cleanliness. Wash with fresh water (refer to Section 7.10).

3. Open control box door. Check for loose electrical connections or hardware.

4. Check color of moisture−liquid indicator.

5.2 CONNECT POWER

! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF start−stop switch (ST), unit circuit
breaker(s) and external power source.

! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.

5.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power

1. Make sure start−stop switch (ST on control panel) and circuit breaker (CB−1 in the control box) are in posi-
tion “0” (OFF).

2. Plug the 460 VAC (yellow) cable into a de−energized 380/460 VAC, 3−phase power source. Energize the
power source. Place circuit breaker (CB−1) in position “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door.

5.2.2 Connection To 190/230 VAC Power

An autotransformer (Figure 5.1) is required to allow operation on nominal 230 volt power. It is fitted with a 230 VAC
cable and a receptacle to accept the standard 460 VAC power plug. The 230 volt cable is black in color while the
460 volt cable is yellow. The transformer may also be equipped with a circuit breaker (CB−2). The transformer is a
step up transformer that will provide 380/460 VAC, 3−phase, 50/60 Hz power to the unit when the 230 VAC power
cable is connected to a 190/230 VAC, 3−phase power source.

5–1 T-365
 1. Make sure that the start−stop switch (ST, on control panel) and circuit breakers CB−1 (in the control box and
CB−2 (on the transformer) are in position “0” (OFF). Plug in and lock the 460 VAC power plug at the recep-
tacle on the transformer.

2. Plug the 230 VAC (black) cable into a de−energized 190/230 VAC, 3−phase power source. Energize the
power source. Set circuit breakers CB−1 and CB−2 to position “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door.

Figure 5.1 Autotransformer

460 VAC Power

Circuit Breaker (CB-2) Receptacle
230-Volt

Dual Voltage
Modular
Autotransformer

5.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT

The purpose of the fresh air makeup vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circulation.
The vent must be closed when transporting frozen foods.
Air exchange depends on static pressure differential, which will vary depending on the container and how the con-
tainer is loaded.
Units may be equipped with a vent position sensor (VPS). The VPS determines the position of the fresh air vent
(upper or lower, as equipped) and sends data to the controller display.

5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent

Two slots and a stop are designed into the Upper Fresh Air disc for air flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a
0 to 30% air flow; the second slot allows for a 30 to 100% air flow.
To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the wing nut and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air flow
matches with the arrow. Tighten the wing nut.
To clear the gap between the slots, loosen the wing nut until the disc clears the stop.
Figure 5.2 gives air exchange values for an empty container.
Higher values can be expected for a fully loaded container.

T-365 5–2
 Figure 5.2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart

AIR AIR
FLOW FLOW
(CMH) (CMH) 60HZ
50HZ
250 300

TBAR TBAR
250 1 1/2”
200 1 1/2”

TBAR TBAR
2 5/8” 200 2 5/8”
150 TBAR 3” TBAR 3”

150

100
100

50
50

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PERCENT OPEN PERCENT OPEN

5.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent

a. Full Open or Closed Positions
Maximum air flow is achieved by loosening the wing nuts and moving the cover to the maximum open
position (100% position). The closed position is 0% air flow position. The operator may also adjust the
opening to increase or decrease the air flow volume to meet the required air flow.
b. Reduced Flow for Lower Fresh Air Makeup

NOTICE
In order to prevent inaccurate display readings on units equipped with a Vent Position Sensor
(VPS), ensure that the rack and pinion drive of the VPS is not disrupted when adjusting the air
makeup vent.

NOTICE
Do not loosen the hex nut beyond its stop. Doing so may cause inaccurate display readings
and errors in DataCORDER reports.
Similar to the Upper Fresh Air Makeup vent, two slots and a stop are designed into the Lower Fresh Air
slide for air flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0 to 25% air flow; the second slot allows for a 25
to 100% air flow. To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the hex nut and rotate the disc until the
desired percentage of air flow matches with the arrow. Tighten the hex nut. To clear the gap between the
slots, loosen the hex nut until the disc clears the stop.
On some models the air slide is supplied with two adjustable air control discs. The fresh air makeup can
be adjusted for 15, 35, 50 or 75 cubic meters per hour (CMH). The air flow has been established at 60
Hz power and 2−1/2 inch T bar and with 15 mm (0.6 inch) H2O external static above free blow.
Loosen the hex nut, adjust each disc to the required air flow, then tighten hex nut.

NOTICE
The main air slide is in the fully closed position during reduced air flow operation when
equipped with air control discs.

5–3 T-365
 c. Air Sampling for Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Level Loosen hex nuts and move the cover until the arrow on the
cover is aligned with the “atmosphere sampling port” label. Tighten the hex nuts and attach a 3/8 in.
hose to the sampling port. If the internal atmosphere content has reached an unacceptable level, the
operator may adjust the disc opening to meet the required air flow volume to ventilate the container.

5.3.3 Vent Position Sensor

The VPS allows the user to determine the position of the fresh air vent via Cd45. This function code is accessible
via the Code Select key.
The vent position will display for 30 seconds whenever motion corresponding to 5 CMH (3 CFM) or greater is
detected. It will scroll in intervals of 5 CMH (3 CFM). Scrolling to Cd45 will display the Fresh Air Vent Position.
The position of the vent will be recorded in the DataCORDER whenever the unit is running under AC power and
any of the following:
Trip start
On every power cycle
Midnight
Manual changes greater than 5 CMH (3 CFM) remaining in the new position for at least four minutes

NOTICE
The user has four minutes to make necessary adjustments to the vent setting. This time calcu-
lation begins on the initial movement of the sensor. The vent can be moved to any position
within the four minutes. On completion of the first four minutes, the vent is required to remain
stable for the next four minutes. If vent position changes are detected during the four minute
stability period, AL50 will be generated. This provides the user with the ability to change the
vent setting without generating multiple events in the DataCORDER.

5.4 eAutoFresh OPERATION

The eAutoFresh system allows the opening and closing of the mechanical air vent slide. The opening and closing
of the slide is determined by the mode selected through Cd43.
The modes of operation are OFF, USER, TEST, DELAY, and GASLIMIT. Each mode of operation has submenus
with selectable parameters. Not all parameters are available in each submenu.
Upon power up, the controller will fully close the eAutoFresh air vent. Nine seconds after power up, the controller will
check if there is a carbon dioxide (CO2) sensor connected. When a CO2 sensor is detected, the controller will enable
access to the Gas Limit mode of operation. If no sensor is detected, the only modes of operation available will be Test,
User, and Delay. The controller will then resume operation in the last mode of operation before power interruption.

5.4.1 eAutoFresh Pre−Trip Inspection

Pre−trip testing of the eAutoFresh system is performed during Pre−Trip test P0. Operation of the system may be
observed during this test.
Upon initiation of Pre−Trip P0, the current state will be saved and the vent will fully close. This will be followed by
two sequences of opening to 100% and returning to the closed position. No other eAutoFresh mode of operation
will be available until the two cycles of opening and closing have completed. Upon termination of the test, the vent
will open to the previous state and operation will return to the previous mode.
If the last mode was gASLM, the vent will open to the preset FLO setting, the controller will start taking new read-
ings and control based on those readings.

5.4.2 eAutoFresh Start−Up Procedure

To start the system, do the following:
1. Press the “CODE SELECT” key (see Figure 4.2).
2. Press the “UP or DOWN” arrow key until “Cd43” is displayed, then press “ENTER”.

3. Press the “UP or DOWN“ arrow key to access the desired mode of operation. When the mode operation is
displayed press the enter key to access the submenu parameters.

T-365 5–4
5.4.3 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation

NOTICE
When setting any mode of operation, complete the entire process to ensure all parameters are set.

a. OFF
A setting of OFF will disable all automatic venting operations. The eAutoFresh vent will be driven fully
closed and the eAutoFresh opening set to 0 CMH in Cd44. This is the default mode whenever a frozen
mode of operation has been selected. When the frozen set point is selected, the current eAutoFresh set-
ting is saved. The vent position will be restored when a perishable set point is selected.

b. USER
The USER mode provides ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circulation. The flow rate
can be accessed through the submenu if a perishable set point has been selected. To set the flow
rate, press the ENTER key to activate the selection mode. When FLO appears in the left hand win-
dow, use the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll to the desired opening. The range is from 0 to 220CM
(0 to 129CF) in increments of 5. Press the ENTER key to set the value and begin operation.

c. TEST
TEST mode allows the operator to test the movement of the mechanical slide air vent and calibrate the
CO2 sensor.
tESt − When “tESt” appears in the left window, press the ENTER key to begin the test. The eAutoFresh
slide will open fully and then return to the closed position. The test may be observed by the operator to
ensure proper operation of the vent. After completion of the TEST, the unit will return to the previous
mode of operation.

NOTICE
It is recommended that the calibration procedure only be performed during Pre−trip or when
the container has been fully vented.

CAL will attempt to calibrate the CO2 sensor. When “CAL“ is selected the display will flash “CAL“. The
operator is to hold the “ENTER“ key for 5 seconds. The display will stop flashing and read “CAL“ for 5
seconds. The microprocessor will read the CO2 value, and then compare that value to a known zero
value. If the sensor is within the calibration parameter range, the microprocessor will determine the
appropriate offset for the sensor. If the sensor is outside of this range, for example if the container is
loaded or has a high level of CO2, the controller will flash “NOCAL“ for 5 seconds then revert to the pre-
vious mode of operation.

d. DELAY
In DELAY mode, the operation of the eAutoFresh system will be delayed for a set amount of time. This
allows time for the cargo to reach set point. In DELAY mode, the eAutoFresh vent will open to the stored
(FLO) value when the return air temperature sensor (RTS) is at or below set point plus the return offset
value (rtn) or the delay time (tIM), whichever comes first. The eAutoFresh vent will be fully closed when
return air temperature is greater than the set point plus the offset temperature (rtn).
To set the unit in Delay mode, scroll until “DELAY“ appears in the left window, press ENTER to activate
the submenu. The first selection is the amount of time (tIM) for the delay. Select the amount of time for
the delay by using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The range is from 1 to 72 hours in 1 hour increments.
Press the ENTER key to set the value and move to the FLO rate. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to
scroll to the desired FLO rate.
The range is from 0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF) in increments of 5 and 3 respectively. Press the ENTER key
to set the value and move to the return temperature offset. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll to
the desired rtn rate. The range of offset is from 0.6C to 2.8C (1.0F to 2.8F) in 0.1 increments. Press
ENTER to set the value and begin operation.

5–5 T-365
 e. GAS LIMIT (gASLM)
In GAS LIMIT mode, access to the submenu is available provided a perishable set point has been
selected, and a valid reading is detected from the CO2 sensor. In “Gas limit” mode the microprocessor
will monitor and limit the level of CO2 in the container by opening and closing the eAutoFresh vent. The
vent will open to the (FLO) setting once the unit has completed initial temperature pull down or if the
cargo temperature is within 5C of set point and the CO2 level has reached the max limit or if the O2 level
has reached the lower limit. After the first 15 minutes of the vent opening the controller will again evalu-
ate the level of CO2, and/or O2 levels. If after the first 15 minutes the gas limit values are satisfied, the
vent will close, if either gas limit has not been satisfied within 15 minutes the air exchange vent will open
in 10 CMH increments every 15 minutes until both gas concentrations are satisfied. Once all limits are
satisfied the vent will return to the closed position. If conditions are not met with the slide open 100% for
90 minutes AL29 will be activated.
To operate in GAS LIMIT mode, scroll until gASLM appears in the left window, and press ENTER to acti-
vate the submenu. The first selection is the maximum CO2 level (CO2LM). Select the maximum CO2
level by using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The range is from 0 to 19% in 1% increments. Press
ENTER to set the value and move to the minimum O2 level (O2LM). The range is from 2% to 20% in 1%
increments. Press ENTER to set the value and move to the FLO rate. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key
to scroll to the desired FLO rate. The range is from 0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF) in increments of 5 and 3
respectively. Press ENTER to set the value and begin operation.

Operational Parameters (Sub Menu Options):

FLO indicates the opening to which the slide will move based on the stored value in CMH (in increments
of 5) or CFM depending on the selection of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the
pressing of the deg C/F key. CFM is displayed as CF, CMH is displayed as CM.
tIM is the time delay prior to the door opening. The time range is from 1 to 72 hrs in 1 hr increments.
CO2LM is the maximum level of CO2 that is allowed for the cargo. The range is from 0% to 19% in 1%
increments, the default setting is 10.
O2LM is the minimum level of O2 that is allowed for the cargo. The range is from 2% to 20% in 1% incre-
ments, the default setting is 10.
Rtn is an offset value used to expand the return air temperature value to compensate for the fresh air
entering the container. The allowable range is from 0.6°C to 2.8°C or 1.0°F to 5.0°F in 0.1 increments
the default setting is 2.8°C (5°F).

5.5 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE

If remote monitoring is required, connect the remote monitor plug at the unit receptacle, see Figure 3.5. When the
remote monitor plug is connected to the remote monitoring receptacle, the following remote circuits are energized:

CIRCUIT FUNCTION

Sockets B to A Energizes remote cool light

Sockets C to A Energizes remote defrost light

Sockets D to A Energizes remote in−range light

5.6 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS

! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) (CB−1 & CB−2) and the START−STOP switch (ST) are
in the “O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.

T-365 5–6
 NOTICE
The electronic phase detection system will check for proper compressor rotation within the
first 30 seconds. If rotation is not correct, the compressor will be stopped and restarted in the
opposite direction. If the compressor is producing unusually loud and continuous noise after
the first 30 seconds of operation, stop the unit and investigate.

5.6.1 Starting the Unit

1. With power properly applied, the fresh air vent in proper position, place the START−STOP switch to “I” (ON),
see Figure 3.5.
2. The Controller Function Codes for the container ID (Cd40), software version (Cd18) and unit model number
(Cd20) will be displayed in sequence.
3. Continue with Start Up Inspection, Section 5.7.

5.6.2 Stopping the Unit

To stop the unit, place the START−STOP switch in position “0” (OFF).

5.7 START−UP INSPECTION

5.7.1 Physical Inspection

Check rotation of condenser and evaporator fans.

5.7.2 Check Controller Function Codes

Check, and if required, reset controller Function Codes (Cd27 through Cd39) in accordance with desired operating
parameters. Refer to Table 4–3.

5.7.3 Start Temperature Recorder DataCORDER

1. Check and, if required, set the DataCORDER Configuration in accordance with desired recording parameter.
Refer to Section 4.8.3.
2. Enter a “Trip Start.” To enter a “Trip Start,” do the following:
a. Depress the ALT MODE key. When the left display shows, dC, depress the ENTER key.
b. Scroll to Code dC30.
c. Depress and hold the ENTER key for five seconds.
d. The “Trip Start” event will be entered in the Data-CORDER.

5.7.4 Complete Inspection

Allow the unit to run for five minutes to stabilize conditions, and then perform a Pre−trip diagnosis in accordance
with Section 4.7.

5.8 PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSIS

! CAUTION
Pre−trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When Pre−trip key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated. At the
completion of Pre−trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated.
Pre−trip diagnosis provides automatic testing of the unit components using internal measurements and compari-
son logic. The program will provide a “PASS” or “FAIL” display to indicate test results.

5–7 T-365
The testing begins with access to a Pre−trip selection menu. The user may have the option of selecting one of two
automatic tests.
These tests will automatically perform a series of individual Pre−trip tests. The user may also scroll down to select
any of the individual tests.
When only the short sequence is configured, it will appear as “AUtO” in the display. Otherwise “AUtO1” will indicate
the short sequence and “AUtO2” will indicate the long sequence. The test short sequence will run tests P0 through
P6. The long test sequence will run tests P0 through P10.
A detailed description of the Pre−trip test codes is listed in Table 4–4. If no selection is made, the Pre−trip menu
selection process will terminate automatically. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated man-
ually if required.
Scrolling down to the “rSLts” code and pressing ENTER will allow the user to scroll through the results of the last
Pre−trip testing run. If no Pre−testing has been run (or an individual test has not been run) since the unit was pow-
ered up, “−−−−” will be displayed.
To start a Pre−trip test, do the following:

NOTICE
1. Prior to starting a Pre−trip test, verify that unit voltage (Cd07) is within tolerance and unit amper-
age draw (Cd04, Cd05, Cd06) are within expected limits. Otherwise, tests may fail incorrectly.

2. All alarms must be rectified and cleared before starting tests.

3. Pre−trip may also be initiated via communications. The operation is the same as for the keypad
initiation described below except that should a test fail, the Pre−trip mode will automatically termi-
nate. When initiated via communications, a Pre−trip test may not be interrupted with an arrow key,
but the Pre−trip test can be terminated with the PRE−TRIP key.
1. Press the PRE−TRIP key to accesses the Pre−trip test selection menu.
2. TO RUN AN AUTOMATIC TEST: Scroll through the selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN
ARROW keys to display AUTO, AUTO 1, AUTO 2 or AUTO 3 as desired, then press ENTER.
a. The unit will execute the series of tests without any need for direct user interface. These tests vary in
length, depending on the component under test.
b. While tests are running, “P#−#” will appear on the left display; the #’s indicate the test number and
sub−test. The right display will show a countdown time in minutes and seconds, indicating the amount of
time remaining in the test.

! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting oper-
ator intervention.
When an automatic test fails, it will be repeated once. A repeated test failure will cause “FAIL” to be shown on the
right display, with the corresponding test number to the left.
The user may then press the DOWN ARROW to repeat the test, the UP ARROW to skip to the next test, or the
PRE−TRIP key to terminate testing. The unit will wait indefinitely or until the user manually enters a command.

! CAUTION
When Pre−trip test Auto2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
Pre−trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key!
When an Auto 1 Pre−trip test runs to completion without a failure, the unit will exit Pre−trip mode and return to nor-
mal control operation. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if required.

T-365 5–8
 3. TO RUN AN INDIVIDUAL TEST: Scroll through the selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN
ARROW keys to display an individual test code. Pressing ENTER when the desired test code is displayed.
a. Individually selected tests, other than the LED/Display test, will perform the operations necessary to ver-
ify the operation of the component. At the conclusion, PASS or FAIL will be displayed. This message will
remain displayed for up to three minutes, during which time a user may select another test. If the three
minute time period expires, the unit will terminate pre−trip and return to control mode operation.
b. While the tests are being executed, the user may terminate the pre−trip diagnostics by pressing and
holding the PRE−TRIP key. The unit will then resume normal operation. If the user decides to terminate a
test but remain at the test selection menu, the user may press the UP ARROW key. When this is done, all
test outputs will be de−energized and the test selection menu will be displayed.
c. During Pre−trip testing, current limiting and pressure limiting are both active, except during P−7 (High
Pressure Switch Testing) when pressure limiting is turned off.
4. Pre−Trip Test Results
At the end of the pre−trip test selection menu, the message “P,” “rSLts” (Pre−trip results) will be displayed.
Pressing the ENTER key will allow the user to see the results for all sub-tests (i.e., 1−0, 1−1, etc).
The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all the tests run to completion since power up. If a test
has not been run since power up, “-----” will be displayed.
Once all Pre-test activity is completed, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if
required.

5.9 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS

A complete temperature probe check is performed during the P5 Pre−trip test. A probe check is also run at the end
of a defrost cycle; the defrost light will remain on during this period. If supply probes are within limits and return
probes are within limits, the unit will return to normal operation. During normal operation, the controller continu-
ously monitors and compares adjacent temperature probe readings.
The probe check procedure consists of running the evaporator fans for up to eight minutes in order to compare the
readings from the adjacent temperature probes. If a significant difference in temperature readings is detected
between probes, a defrost cycle, followed by another probe check may be initiated. Any continued disagreement
between probes will prompt the controller to invalidate the failed temperature probe, and the backup probe will be
used for temperature control.
In Perishable Mode, both pairs of supply and return probes are monitored for probe disagreement. Probe disagree-
ment is considered a difference of 0.5°C (0.9°F) or greater between the supply air sensors and/or a difference of 2.0°C
(3.6°F) between the return air sensors. Probe disagreement found in either pair can trigger a defrost probe check.
In Frozen Mode, only the controlling probes are considered. Disagreement of the controlling probes can trigger a
defrost probe check, which will occur when the difference between the sensors is greater than 2.0°C (3.6°F). Normally,
the controlling probes are the return probes but if both return probes are invalidated, the supply probes are used for
control purposes. Probe disagreement of the non−controlling probe pair will not trigger a defrost probe check.
If after the defrost probe check the supply probes agree and return probes agree, all supply and return sensors are
considered valid and the unit returns to normal control.

In the Case of Probe Disagreement:

If the supply probes disagree and the return probes agree, the controller will invalidate the worst supply probe. If
the probe check is run as part of Pre−trip P−5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time
defrost probe check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be triggered. However, if the best
supply probe is greater than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its return probes, the best supply probe is also
invalidated. If unit is in Perishable Mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both supply probes.
If the supply probes agree and the return probes disagree, invalidate the worst return probe. If the probe check is
being run as part of Pre−trip P−5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time defrost probe
check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be necessary. If the best return probe is greater
than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its supply probes, then the best return probe is also invalidated. If the
unit is in perishable mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both return probes.

5–9 T-365
 SECTION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
External power source OFF Turn On
Start−Stop switch OFF or defective Check
No power to unit
Circuit breaker tripped or OFF Check
Autotransformer not connected Section 5.2.2
Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
Control transformer defective Replace
Loss of control power
Fuse (F3A/F3B) blown Check
Start−Stop switch OFF or defective Check
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.14
Condenser fan motor internal protector open Section 7.8
Compressor internal protector open Section 7.8
Component(s) not operating
High pressure switch open Section 6.7
Heat termination thermostat open Replace
Malfunction of current sensor Replace

6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Hot load Normal
Container
Defective box insulation or air leak Repair
Shortage of refrigerant Section 7.3
Evaporator coil covered with ice Section 6.6
Evaporator coil plugged with debris Section 7.13
Air bypass around evaporator coil Check
Controller set too low Reset
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve par- Open valves
Refrigeration system tially closed completely
Dirty condenser Section 7.10.1
Compressor worn Section 7.8
Current limit (function code Cd32) set to wrong value Section 4.4.3
Economizer solenoid valve malfunction Section 7.17
Digital unloader valve stuck open Section 7.21.1
Electronic expansion valve Section 7.16.1

6–1 T-365
6.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING
Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Abnormal pressures Section 6.7
Abnormal temperatures Section 6.15
Abnormal currents Section 6.16
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Evaporator fan or motor defective Section 7.14
Refrigeration system
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve par- Open valves
tially closed completely
Frost on coil Section 6.10
Digital unloader valve stuck open Section 7.21.1
Electronic expansion valve Section 7.16.1

6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Start−Stop switch OFF or defective Check
No operation of any kind Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
External power source OFF Turn ON
Circuit breaker or fuse defective Replace
Control Transformer defective Replace
No control power Evaporator fan internal motor protector open Section 7.14
Heat relay defective Check
Heater termination thermostat open Section 7.13
Heater(s) defective Section 7.13
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective or running backwards Section 7.13/
Section 7.14
Unit will not heat or has insufficient Evaporator fan motor contactor defective Replace
heat
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Defective wiring Replace
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Low line voltage Section 3.3

T-365 6–2
6.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING
Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Controller improperly set Reset
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Unit fails to stop heating
Heater termination thermostat remains closed along with Section 7.13
the heat relay

6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Defrost timer malfunction (Cd27) Section Table 4–
3
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Will not initiate defrost automati-
Defective wiring Replace
cally
Defrost temperature sensor defective or heat termination Replace
thermostat open
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Keypad is defective Replace
Will not initiate defrost manually
Defrost temperature sensor open Replace
Initiates but relay (DR) drops out Low Line Voltage Section 3.3
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Initiates but does not defrost
Heater(s) burned out Section 7.13

6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Condenser coil dirty Section 7.10.1
Condenser fan rotating backwards Section 7.10
Condenser fan inoperative Section 7.11
High discharge pressure
Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.3
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace

6–3 T-365
6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES
Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator Replace
pressure transducer (EPT)
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter drier partially plugged Section 7.12

Low suction pressure Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3

No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow Section 7.13
Excessive frost on evaporator coil Section 6.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.14.3
EEV control malfunction Replace
Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
Suction and discharge pressures Compressor operating in reverse Section 6.14
tend to equalize when unit is oper-
Compressor cycling/stopped Check
ating
Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace

6.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Compressor start up after an extended shutdown
Normal
Brief chattering when manually shut down
Compressor operating in reverse Section 6.14
Compressor
Loose mounting bolts or worn resilient mounts Tighten/Replace
Loose upper mounting Section 7.8.1
Liquid slugging Section 7.13
Bent, loose or striking venturi Check
Worn motor bearings Section 7.11/
Condenser or Evaporator Fan Section 7.14
Bent motor shaft Section 7.11/
Section 7.14

6.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check

Defective sensor Section 7.24

Will not control
Defective wiring Check

Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3

T-365 6–4
6.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW
Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Frost on coil Section 6.6
Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil Section 7.13
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.14
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective Section 7.14
No or partial evaporator air flow
Evaporator fan(s) loose or defective Section 7.14
Evaporator fan contactor defective Replace

6.11 EAUTOFRESH NOT OPERATING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Cd43 in Off mode Section 5.4.2
Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Vent not opening
Stepper drive defective Section 7.27.2
Stepper motor defective Section 7.27.4
Unit operating in frozen mode Section 5.4.3
Check CO2 sensor Section 5.4.3
Gas Limit mode unavailable Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Unit operating in frozen mode Section 5.4.3
“Enter” Key not held for sufficient length of time Section 5.4.3
Unable to calibrate CO2 sensor CO2 outside of acceptable levels Check
Check CO2 sensor Section 5.4.3
Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Code 44 displays “-----”
Check CO2 sensor Section 5.4.3

6–5 T-365
6.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION
Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator Replace
pressure transducer (EPT)
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter drier partially plugged Section 7.12
Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3
Low suction pressure
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow Section 7.8
Excessive frost on evaporator coil Section 6.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.14.3
EEV control malfunction Section 7.16
Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace
Foreign material in valve Section 7.16
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator Replace
pressure transducer (EPT)
High suction pressure with low su-
perheat EEV control malfunction Replace
Improperly seated powerhead Ensure power-
head is locked
and in place
Liquid slugging in compressor Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator Replace
pressure transducer (EPT)
Failed EEV Replace

6.13 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Unit will not start Circuit breaker (CB−1 or CB−2) tripped Check
Autotransformer defective Section 7.23
Power source not turned ON Check
460 VAC power plug is not inserted into the receptacle Section 5.2.1

T-365 6–6
6.14 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE
Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section

NOTICE
The compressor may start in reverse for up to 10 seconds to determine correct phase rotation
if required for phase detection.

! CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate in reverse for more than two minutes will result in
internal compressor damage. Turn the start−stop switch OFF immediately.
Incorrect wiring of compressor
Electrical Incorrect wiring of compressor contactor(s) Check
Incorrect wiring of current sensor

6.15 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Gas Cooler coil dirty Section 7.10.1
Gas Cooler fan rotating backwards Section 7.11
Gas Cooler fan inoperative Section 7.11.1
Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.3
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Section 7.16.1
High discharge temperature Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator Replace
pressure transducer (EPT)
Discharge temperature sensor drifting high Replace
Failed economizer expansion valve, economizer coil, or Replace
economizer solenoid valve
Plugged economizer expansion valve, economizer coil, or Replace
economizer solenoid valve
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace

6.16 ABNORMAL CURRENTS

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-
ence Section
Unit reads abnormal currents Current sensor wiring Check

6–7 T-365
 SECTION 7
SERVICE

NOTICE
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refrigerant. When working with refriger-
ants you must comply with all local government environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA
section 608.

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage.

Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the product.

Charge only with R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.

7.1 SECTION LAYOUT

Service procedures are provided herein beginning with refrigeration system service, then refrigeration system com-
ponent service, electrical system service, temperature recorder service and general service. Refer to the Table of
Contents to locate specific topics.

Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set

Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure

Gauge Gauge

Discharge Pressure
Utility Connection to:
Valve Low Side Suction Pressure
A. Refrigerant cylinder
(shown backseated) High Side Connection Valve
B. Vacuum Pump
Connection (shown frontseated)
C. Oil Container

7.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET

The manifold gauge set (see Figure 7.1) is used to determine system operating pressure, add refrigerant charge,
and to equalize or evacuate the system.
When the Suction Pressure Valve is frontseated (turned all the way in), the suction (low) pressure can be checked
at the Suction Pressure Gauge.
When the Discharge Pressure Valve is frontseated, the discharge (high) pressure can be checked at the Discharge
Pressure Gauge.
When both valves are backseated (all the way out), high pressure vapor will flow into the low side.

7–1 T-365
When the Suction Pressure Valve is open and the Discharge Pressure Valve shut, the system can be charged
through the Utility Connection. Oil can also be added to the system.
A R-134a manifold gauge/hose set with self-sealing hoses (see Figure 7.2) is required for service of the models
covered within this manual. The manifold gauge/hose set is available from Carrier Transicold. (Carrier Transicold
part number 07-00294-00, which includes items 1 through 6, Figure 7.2.)
If the manifold gauge/hose set is new or was exposed to the atmosphere, it will need to be evacuated to remove
contaminants and air as follows:

1. Backseat (turn counterclockwise) both field service couplings (see Figure 7.2) and midseat both hand
valves.

2. Connect the yellow hose to a vacuum pump and refrigerant 134a cylinder.

3. Evacuate to 10 inches of vacuum and then charge with R-134a to a slightly positive pressure of 0.1 kg/cm2
(1.0 psig).

4. Frontseat both manifold gauge set valves and disconnect from cylinder. The gauge set is now ready for use.

Figure 7.2 Manifold Gauge/Hose Set

To Low Side To High Side

Access Valve 1 Access Valve
2
6

4
4
7 2 5

1. RED Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose 4. Hose Fitting with O-ring (M14 x 1.5)
(SAE J2196/R-134a) 5. High Side Field Service Coupling (Red Knob)
2. Hose Fitting (0.5-16 Acme) 6. BLUE Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose
3. YELLOW Refrigeration and/or Evacuation (SAE J2196/R-134a)
Hose (SAE J2196/R-134a) 7. Low Side Field Service Coupling (Blue Knob)
-----

7.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

The compressor suction, compressor discharge, and the liquid line service valves (see Figure 7.3) are provided
with a double seat and an access valve which enables servicing of the compressor and refrigerant lines.
Turning the valve stem clockwise (all the way forward) will frontseat the valve to close off the line connection and
open a path to the access valve. Turning the stem counterclockwise (all the way out) will backseat the valve to
open the line connection and close off the path to the access valve.
With the valve stem midway between frontseat and backseat, both of the service valve connections are open to the
access valve path.
For example, the valve stem is first fully backseated when connecting a manifold gauge to measure pressure.
Then, the valve is opened 1/4 to 1/2 turn to measure the pressure.

T-365 7–2
 Figure 7.3 Service Valve

Access Valve
Line Connection
Stem Cap

Valve Stem

Valve (Frontseated) Valve (Backseated)

Compressor of Filter Drier Inlet Connection

Connection of the manifold gauge/hose set (see Figure 7.4) is dependent on the component being serviced. If only
the compressor is being serviced, the high side coupling is connected to the discharge service valve.
For service of the low side (after pump down), the high side coupling is connected to the liquid line service valve.
The center hose connection is brought to the tool being used (vacuum, tank, etc.).
Connecting the manifold gauge set:
1. Remove service valve stem cap and to make sure the valve is backseated.
2. Remove access valve cap (See Figure 7.3).
3. Connect the field service coupling (see Figure 7.2) to the access valve.
4. Turn the field service coupling knob clockwise, which will open the system to the gauge set.
5. To read system pressures, slightly midseat the service valve.
6. Repeat the procedure to connect the other side of the gauge set.

! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set be sure set is brought to suc-
tion pressure before disconnecting.

Removing the Manifold Gauge Set:

1. While the compressor is still ON, backseat the high side service valve.
2. Midseat both hand valves on the manifold gauge set and allow the pressure in the manifold gauge set to be
drawn down to low side pressure. This returns any liquid that may be in the high side hose to the system.
3. Backseat the low side service valve. Backseat both field service couplings and frontseat both manifold hand
valves. Remove couplings from access valves.

4. Install both service valve stem caps and service port caps (finger-tight only).

7.4 PUMP DOWN THE UNIT

To service the filter drier, economizer, expansion valves, economizer solenoid valve, digital loader valve, digital
unloader valve or evaporator coil, pump the refrigerant into the high side as follows:

! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or dis-
charge service valves closed (frontseated). Internal damage will result from operating the com-
pressor in a deep vacuum.

7–3 T-365
Automatic Pump Down:
To perform an Automatic Pump Down using Cd59 Pump Down Logic, refer to Table 4–3 Controller Function
Codes.

Manual Pump Down:

1. Attach manifold gauge set to the compressor suction and discharge service valves. Refer to paragraph 6.2.
2. Start the unit and run in the frozen mode (controller set below -10C (14F) for 10 to 15 minutes.
3. Check function code Cd21 (refer to Section 4.2.2). The economizer solenoid valve should be open. If not,
continue to run until the valve opens.
4. Frontseat the liquid line service valve. Place Start-Stop switch in the OFF position when the suction reaches
a positive pressure of 0.1 bar (1.4 psig).
5. Frontseat the suction and discharge service valves. The refrigerant will be trapped between the compressor
discharge service valves and the liquid line valve.
6. Before opening up any part of the system, a slight positive pressure should be indicated on the pressure
gauge. Remove power from the unit before opening any part of the system. If a vacuum is indicated, emit
refrigerant by cracking the liquid line valve momentarily to build up a slight positive pressure.
7. When opening up the refrigerant system, certain parts may frost. Allow the part to warm to ambient tempera-
ture before dismantling. This avoids internal condensation which puts moisture in the system.
8. After repairs have been made, be sure to perform a refrigerant leak check (refer to Section 7.5), and evacu-
ate and dehydrate the low side (refer to Section 7.6.1).
9. Check refrigerant charge (refer to Section 7.7).

7.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage.

Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the product.

Charge only with R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.

1. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a system is with a R-134a electronic leak detector. Testing
joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating large leaks.
2. If the system is without refrigerant, charge the system with refrigerant 134a to build up pressure between 2.1
to 3.5 bar (30.5 to 50.8 psig). To ensure complete pressurization of the system, refrigerant should be
charged at the compressor suction valve and the liquid line service valve. Remove refrigerant cylinder and
leak-check all connections.

NOTICE
Only refrigerant 134a should be used to pressurize the system. Any other gas or vapor will
contaminate the system, which will require additional purging and evacuation of the system.

3. If required, remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system and repair any leaks. Check for leaks.
4. Evacuate and dehydrate the unit. (Refer to Section 7.6.)
5. Charge unit per Section 7.7.1.

T-365 7–4
7.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION

7.6.1 General
Moisture is detrimental to refrigeration systems. The presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can have many
undesirable effects. The most common are copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freezing-up” of metering devices
by free water, and formation of acids, resulting in metal corrosion.

7.6.2 Preparation
1. Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak test (refer to Section 7.5).
2. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate any system include a vacuum pump (8 m3/hr = 5 cfm
volume displacement) and an electronic vacuum gauge. The pump is available from Carrier Transicold, P/N
07-00176-11. The magnet is P/N 07-00512-00. The micron gauge is P/N 07-00414-00.
3. If possible, keep the ambient temperature above 15.6°C (60°F) to speed evaporation of moisture. If the
ambient temperature is lower than 15.6°C (60°F), ice might form before moisture removal is complete. Heat
lamps or alternate sources of heat may be used to raise the system temperature.
4. Additional time may be saved during a complete system pump down by replacing the filter drier with a sec-
tion of copper tubing and the appropriate fittings. Installation of a new drier may be performed during the
charging procedure.

Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections

12 13
3

2
5

4
9
6
S D

11

10 8

1. Liquid Service Connection 8. Electronic Vacuum Gauge

2. Economizer Solenoid Valve 9. Manifold Gauge Set
3. Receiver or Water Cooled Condenser 10. Refrigerant Cylinder
4. Compressor 11. Reclaimer
5. Discharge Service Connection 12. Discharge Loader Valve
6. Suction Service Connection 13. Discharge Unloader Valve
7. Vacuum Pump
-----

7–5 T-365
7.6.3 Complete System

NOTICE
Refer to Partial System procedure for information pertaining to partial system evacuation and
dehydration.
1. Remove all refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system.
2. The recommended method to evacuate and dehydrate the system is to connect evacuation hoses at the
compressor discharge and suction and liquid line service valve (see Figure 7.4). Be sure the service hoses
are suited for evacuation purposes.

NOTICE
To prevent the area between the Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) and the Compressor from
being isolated during evacuation, it is necessary to open the ESV using a magnet tool, Carrier
Transicold part number 07-00512-00.

To prevent the area between the DUV and the Compressor from being isolated during evacua-
tion, it is necessary to open the DUV using a magnet tool, Carrier Transicold part number 07-
00512-00.
3. Remove the ESV and DUV coils from the valve bodies. Place the magnet tool over the valve stem, an audi-
ble click will be heard when the ESV opens.

NOTICE
Make sure to replace the valve coils before restating the unit. Starting the unit with the coil
removed from the valve will burn out the coil.
4. Test the evacuation setup for leaks by backseating the unit service valves and drawing a deep vacuum with
the vacuum pump and gauge valves open. Shut off the pump and check to see if the vacuum holds. Repair
leaks if necessary.
5. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves.
6. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum gauge valves, if they are not already open. Start the vacuum
pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vacuum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the electronic vacuum
gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure the vacuum holds.
7. Break the vacuum with either clean dry refrigerant 134a or dry nitrogen. Raise system pressure to roughly
0.14 bar (2 psig), monitoring it with the compound gauge.
8. If R134a was used, remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system. If nitrogen was used, relieve the
pressure.
9. Repeat steps 6 and 7 one time.
10.Remove the copper tubing and change the filter drier. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the electronic
vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait five minutes to see if vacuum
holds. This procedure checks for residual moisture and/or leaks.
11. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant charge may be drawn into the system from a refrigerant con-
tainer on weight scales.

7.6.4 Partial System

1. If refrigerant charge has been removed from the low side only, evacuate the low side by connecting the
evacuation set-up at the compressor suction valve and the liquid service valve but leave the service valves
frontseated until evacuation is completed.
2. Once evacuation has been completed and the pump has been isolated, fully backseat the service valves to
isolate the service connections and then continue with checking and, if required, adding refrigerant in accor-
dance with normal procedures.

T-365 7–6
7.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage.

Never use air or gases containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the product.

Charge only with R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.

7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge

NOTICE
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refrigerant. When working with refriger-
ants you must comply with all local government environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA
Section 608.
1. Connect the gauge manifold to the compressor discharge and suction service valves. For units operating on
a water cooled condenser, change over to air cooled operation.
2. Bring the container temperature to approximately 0°C (32°F) or below. Then set the controller set point to -
25°C (-13°F).
3. Partially block the condenser coil inlet air. If covering the lower portion of the coil is not sufficient, remove
the left hand infill panel and cover the left side of the coil. Increase the area blocked until the compressor dis-
charge pressure is raised to approximately 12.8 bar (185 psig).
4. On units equipped with a receiver, the level should be between the glasses. On units equipped with a water-
cooled condenser, the level should be at the center of the glass. If the refrigerant level is not correct, con-
tinue with the following paragraphs to add or remove refrigerant as required.

7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge)

1. Evacuate unit and leave in deep vacuum. (Refer to Section 7.6.)
2. Place cylinder of R-134a on scale and connect charging line from cylinder to liquid line valve. Purge
charging line at liquid line valve and then note weight of cylinder and refrigerant.
3. Open liquid valve on cylinder. Open liquid line valve half-way and allow liquid refrigerant to flow into the unit
until the correct weight of refrigerant (refer to Section 3.2) has been added as indicated by scales.

NOTICE
It may be necessary to finish charging unit through suction service valve in gas form, due to
pressure rise in high side of the system.
4. Backseat manual liquid line valve (to close off gauge port). Close liquid valve on cylinder.
5. Start unit in cooling mode. Run for approximately 10 minutes and check the refrigerant charge.

7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge)

1. Examine refrigerant system for any evidence of leaks, repair as necessary. (Refer to Section 7.5.).
2. Maintain the conditions outlined in Section 7.7.1.
3. Fully backseat the suction service valve and remove the service port cap.
4. Connect charging line between suction service valve port and cylinder of refrigerant R-134a. Open VAPOR
valve.
5. Partially frontseat (turn clockwise) the suction service valve and slowly add charge until the refrigerant
appears at the proper level. Be careful not to frontseat the suction valve fully, if the compressor is operated
in a vacuum, internal damage may result.

7–7 T-365
7.8 COMPRESSOR

! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the com-
pressor.

! WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor, be sure to relieve the internal pressure very carefully
by slightly loosening the couplings to break the seal.

! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or dis-
charge service valves closed (frontseated). Internal damage will result from operating the com-
pressor in a deep vacuum.

7.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor

1. Turn the unit start-stop switch (ST) and unit circuit breaker (CB-1) OFF, and disconnect power to the unit.
Follow the regional lock out tag out procedure for electrical system.
2. Remove the compressor guard and install R134a manifold gauges on the compressor suction and discharge
service valves.
3. Remove the Digital Un-loader (DUV) coil and place the magnet on the valve stem to open the coil. Leave
magnet on the coil. If a magnet is not available perform the Jumper procedure:
a. Remove all 4 controller fuses (F1, F2, F3a, F3b).
b. Remove the KA6 wire from KA controller connector on the front of the controller.
c. Disconnect the X1 wire from the 24VAC side of transformer (black wire) and locate it away for the trans-
former.
d. Jumper between the black transformer wire to the KA6 wire removed from the connector.
e. Connect power to unit and turn circuit breaker on (DUV coil is now energized).
4. Connect a refrigerant recovery machine and and recover any refrigerant out of the compressors and DUV
line following the recovery machine recommendations (refer to the recovery machines Operation and Ser-
vice manual for proper procedures).
5. If a jumper was used in step c, on completion of the recovery turn the circuit breaker off and disconnect the
power. Follow the regional lock out tag out procedure for electrical system.
6. Remove the compressor terminal cover, disconnect the ground wire and remove (pull) the cable plug from
the compressor terminals. Install the terminal cover back after removing the power cable.

NOTICE
Inspect the power cable (plug) terminals to ensure they are not deformed or have any signs of
heat or arcing. If any damage is noted replace the power cable.

7. Remove the rotalock fittings from the suction and discharge service connections, and uncouple the unloader
and economizer lines from the compressor.
8. Cut the dome temperature sensor wires. The replacement compressor comes with a dome temperature sen-
sor already assembled.
9. Remove and save the compressor base-mounting screws. Discard the resilient mounts and washers.

T-365 7–8
10.Remove (slide out) the old compressor from the unit tagging it with unit information and reason for replace-
ment.
11. Wire tie the compressor base plate with the wire ties (Figure 7.5, item # 10) to the compressor, and slide the
new compressor in the unit. You may need to slightly tilt the compressor back.
DO NOT add any oil to the replacement compressor. Replacement compressor is shipped with full oil charge
of 60 oz.
12.Cut and discard the wire ties that were used to hold the base plate to the compressor.

Figure 7.5 Compressor Kit

3 4

2
2

11, 12
8

7
1

10

1. Compressor 8. Resilient Mount

2. Teflon Seal for Valve Connection (2) 9. Mylar Washers
3. O-Ring (Unloader Connection) 10. Wire Ties
4. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 11. Power Cable Gasket
5. O-Ring (Economizer Connection) 12. Ground Connection Screw
6. Base Mounting Bolts 13. Power Cable Lubricant - Krytox (Not Shown)
7. SST Washers
-----
13.Put the new SST washers (Figure 7.5, item # 7) on each side of the resilient mounts (Figure 7.5, item #8),
and the new mylar washer (Figure 7.5, item # 9) on the bottom of it as shown in Figure 7.7. Install the four
base-mounting screws loosely.
14.Place the new teflon seals (Figure 7.5, item # 2) at the compressor suction and discharge ports as well as
the O-rings (Figure 7.5, items #3 and #5) at the unloader and economizer line connection ports. Lubricate
the O-rings and the shoulder of the ORS fittings for the unloader and economizer ports. Hand tight all four
connections.
15.Torque the four base-mounting screws (Figure 7.5, item #6) to 6.2 mkg (45 ft-lbs.).
16.Torque the compressor ports / connections to the following values. (Refer to Figure 7.6 for locations)

7–9 T-365
:
Service Valve / Connection Torque Value

1 Suction and Discharge Rotalocks 108.5 to 135.5 Nm (80 to 100 ft-lbs.)

2 Unloader connection 24.5 to 27 Nm (18 to 20 ft-lbs.)

3 Economized connection 32.5 to 35 Nm (24 to 26 ft-lbs.)

Figure 7.6 Compressor Ports/Connections

DLV DUV
2

3
1

17.Connect the new compressor dome temperature sensor with the old sensor wires removed in step i using
butt-splices and heat shrinks. Wire-tie any loose wiring as appropriate.
18.Open the compressor terminal cover and connect the compressor power cable following the steps below:
a. Liberally coat the orange gasket (Figure 7.5, item #11) surfaces with the Krytox lubricant (Figure 7.5,
item #13) as shown in Figure 7.7.

Figure 7.7 Lubricating Orange Gasket

b. Install the orange gasket part onto the compressor fusite with the grooved or threaded side out as shown
in Figure 7.8. Ensure that the gasket is seated onto the fusite base.

T-365 7–10
 Figure 7.8 Installing Orange Gasket

c. Coat the inside of the power plug (female) connector pins with the Krytox lubricant (Figure 7.5, item #13),
and Insert the plug onto the compressor terminal connections. Make sure, the orange gasket has bot-
tomed out onto the fusite and it fits securely onto the terminal pins while fully inserted into the orange
plug as shown in Figure 7.9 and Figure 7.10.

Figure 7.9 Power Plug Connection Figure 7.10 Power Plug Secured

19.Connect the green ground wire (Figure 7.10 above) to the grounding tab located inside the terminal box of
the compressor using the self tapping grounding screw (Figure 7.5, item #12). Close the compressor termi-
nal box using the terminal cover removed.
20.Evacuate the compressor to 1000 microns (refer to the Operation and Service manual for proper proce-
dures).
If jumper procedure was used in step c, reconnect unit to power and turn on the circuit breaker to again
power the DUV.
21.On completion of the vacuum, remove the magnet and reinstall the DUV coil.
If a jumper was used, turn off the circuit breaker and disconnect power. Reconnect the X1 wire to the black
transformer wire. Reinstall and secure the KA6 wire to the KA plug at the controller.
22.Mid seat service valves, connect power to the unit; turn the unit ON and run it in full cool mode for 10 min-
utes.
23.Initiate code select 59 (unit pump down).
Choosing code select 59, the user will be advised to close (front seat) the Liquid Line Valve (king valve). The
display will flash “CLOSE LLV” and “PrESS EntEr.” Upon closing the valve, select the enter key. Pump down
“PdN” will display on the left with the suction pressure on the right. Upon completion of the pump down the
display will flash between “PdN”“DOnE” and “SHUT OFF.”
24.Front seat the suction and discharge service valve and replace the filter drier.
25.Evacuate the suction side and compressor to 1000 microns.

7–11 T-365
 26.Backseat all service valves, and run in full cool.
27.Verify refrigerant charge level per the unit s operation/service manual.
28.Perform a leak check of the system.
29.Replace any removed wire tie wraps and reinstall compressor guard.
30.If failure occurs under the unit’s warranty, tag the replacement part for cause of failure and collect an all data
download for failure analysis.

7.9 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH

7.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch

! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.

NOTICE
The high pressure switch is non-adjustable.

1. Remove switch as outlined in Figure 7.9.2.

2. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across switch terminals. Ohm meter will indicate no resistance or con-
tinuity light will be illuminated if the switch closed after relieving compressor pressure.
3. Connect hose to a cylinder of dry nitrogen. (See Figure 7.11)

Figure 7.11 High Pressure Switch Testing

Cylinder Valve & Gauge Pressure Gauge

Bleed-Off Valve
Pressure Regulator

Nitrogen Cylinder
1/4 Inch Connection

4. Set nitrogen pressure regulator at 26.4 kg/cm2 (375 psig) with bleed-off valve closed.
5. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve.
6. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve to increase pressure on switch. The switch should open at
a static pressure up to 25 kg/cm2 (350 psig). If a light is used, the light will go out. If an ohmmeter is used,
the meter will indicate open circuit.
7. Slowly open bleed-off valve to decrease the pressure. The switch should close at 18 kg/cm2 (250 psig).

7.9.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch

1. Remove the refrigerant charge.
2. Disconnect wiring from defective switch. The high pressure switch is located on the discharge connection or
line and is removed by turning counterclockwise.
3. Install a new high pressure switch after verifying switch settings.
4. Evacuate, dehydrate and recharge the system.
5. Start the unit, verify refrigeration charge and oil level.

T-365 7–12
7.10 CONDENSER COIL
The condenser coil consists of a series of parallel copper tubes expanded into copper fins and formed into a “C”
shape with the fourth side of the square formed by the side support bracket.

7.10.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning

To ensure optimal efficiency of the unit the condenser coil must be clean. The condenser coil should be cleaned at
least once a year, but more frequent cleaning may be required depending on operating conditions. The coil is
cleaned with fresh water sprayed in the reverse direction of the air flow to remove any debris from the coil. A high
pressure washer is not required, mains water pressure is sufficient. To clean the condenser coil perform the follow-
ing procedure:

! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power
plug.

1. Make sure the unit is powered off and the plug is disconnected.
2. Remove the condenser fan grille.
3. Starting from the top of the coil, use a water hose with a nozzle to wash the coil from the inside out.
4. Systematically wash across the inside top face of the coil until the water runs clean.
5. Wash down the center section, and then through the bottom of the coil, continue washing until the water runs
clear.
6. After the coil is clean, rinse the condenser fan to remove any dirt build up from the blades.
7. Replace the condenser fan grille ensuring that it is centered around the fan.

7.10.2 Condenser Coil Removal

1. Using a refrigerant reclaim system remove the refrigerant charge.

! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power
plug.

2. Remove the condenser fan grille, retain all bolts and washers for reuse.
3. Remove the condenser fan.
4. Remove the infill panels to the left and right of the condenser fan shroud.
5. Remove the condenser fan shroud.
6. Unplug the condenser fan motor.
7. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around the motor wire harness to allow the harness to be slid back
through the side support bracket.
8. Cut the top and bottom drain lines midway between the side support bracket and the first cable tie, approx
150mm (6”) from the side support bracket.
9. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around the drain lines to allow the tubes to be slid back through the
side support bracket.
10.Remove filter drier.
11. Unbraze the inlet connection to coil.
12.Remove the cushion clamps securing the liquid line to the top and bottom receiver brackets, retain all
clamps and securing hardware.
13.Place a support under the condenser coil before releasing the coil from the frame.

7–13 T-365
 14.Remove the lower mounting bracket bolts from the inside of the coil.
15.Remove the top mounting bracket bolts and grille extension mount from inside the coil.
16.Remove the side support bracket mounting bolts.
17.Slide the condenser assembly with receiver out of the unit.

7.10.3 Condenser Coil Preparation

Before installing the new condenser coil, the receiver assembly and mounting hardware must be removed from the
old coil assembly:
1. From the old coil, unbolt the receiver assembly from side support bracket.
2. Unbraze the receiver assembly from the coil outlet line and remove from the coil assembly.
3. Unbolt the side support bracket from the top and bottom coil supports and remove from old coil.
4. Refit the side support bracket to the new coil ensuring that the top and bottom are flush mounted with the
coil support.

7.10.4 Condenser Coil Installation

Once the side support bracket has been secured to the new condenser coil, the entire assembly is ready to be
installed into the unit:
1. Slide the new condenser coil into place ensuring the coil inlet connection is mated to the pipework and that
the coil is fully supported.
2. Secure the condenser coil into the unit using the retained hardware; refit the mylar and fender washers:
a. Refit the side support bracket bolts.
b. Refit the top support bracket bolts as well as the top grille extension support.
c. Refit the bottom support bracket bolts.
3. Braze the condenser coil inlet connection.
4. Insert the receiver pipe work onto the coil outlet and loosely secure the receiver assembly to the side sup-
port bracket with the retained hardware.
5. Braze the outlet connection to the receiver assembly.
6. Install a new filter drier.
7. Replace the liquid line cushion clamps.
8. Secure the receiver assembly to the side support bracket.
9. Pressure / leak test the coil and filter drier connections, refer to Section 7.5.
10.Evacuate the entire unit, refer to Section 7.6.
11. Slide the top and bottom drain lines back into place through the side support bracket.
12.Using the two supplied straight connectors and contact adhesive reconnect the drain lines.
13.Slide the condenser fan motor wiring harness back through the side support bracket and refit to condenser
motor.
14.Replace all wire ties that were removed to properly secure the drain line and wiring.
15.Reseal the wire harness and drain line penetrations with the putty.
16.Slide the condenser fan onto the motor shaft reversed but do not secure.
17.Refit the condenser fan shroud to the unit. Use the condenser fan as a guide to ensure the shroud is prop-
erly centered around the fan.
18.Remove the condenser fan, and place it on the shaft facing the correct direction. Adjust the fan to the correct
position, 37mm (1.5”) from the fan shroud, see Figure 7.12.

T-365 7–14
 Figure 7.12 Condenser Fan Position

37mm (1.5”)

Fan

Shroud

19.Use Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and tighten.

20.Refit left and right infill panels.
21.Refit the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille is properly centered around the condenser fan.
22.Evacuate the entire unit, refer to Section 7.6.
23.Recharge the unit with the charge shown on the unit serial plate, refer to Section 7.7. It is important for
proper unit operation that the charge is weighed into the unit.

7.11 CONDENSER FAN AND FAN MOTOR

The condenser fan rotates counter-clockwise (viewed from front of unit). The fan pulls air through the condenser
coil, and discharges the air horizontally through the front of the unit.

7.11.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace

! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power
plug.

1. Remove the condenser fan grille, retain all bolts and washers for reuse.
2. Remove the condenser fan by loosening the two set screws.
3. Disconnect the condenser fan motor wiring.

! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.

7–15 T-365
 4. Note the number of shims on each side of the motor as the same configuration will be required to refit the
new motor.
5. Remove the fan motor mounting hardware and remove motor.
6. Loosely mount the new motor using new lock nuts.
7. Connect the fan motor wiring to the new fan motor.
8. Replace the shims in the same configuration as they were removed.
9. Tighten the fan motor mounting bolts to properly secure the motor.
10.To make sure that the motor is aligned properly, slide the condenser fan onto the motor shaft reversed but do
not secure.
11. Rotate the fan to make sure the fan blades do not contact the shroud:
a. If the fan motor is misaligned vertically, add or remove shims to align.
b. If the fan motor is not properly centered, loosen the mounting bolts, and adjust the motor position on the
bracket, and then secure the motor.
12.Remove the condenser fan, and connect the fan motor wiring to the fan motor.
13.Place the condenser fan on the shaft facing the correct direction. Adjust the fan to the correct position,
37mm (1.5”) from the fan shroud, see Figure 7.12.
14.Use Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and tighten.
15.Refit the left and right infill panels.
16.Refit the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille is properly centered around condenser fan.

7.12 FILTER DRIER

To check filter drier:

1. Test for a restricted or plugged filter drier by feeling the liquid line inlet and outlet connections. If the outlet
side feels cooler than the inlet side, then the filter drier should be changed.
2. Check the moisture-liquid indicator if the indicator shows a high level of moisture, the filter drier should be
replaced.

To replace filter drier:

1. Pump down the unit (refer to Section 7.4). Evacuate if unit is not equipped with service valves. Then replace
filter drier.
2. Evacuate the low side in accordance with Section 7.6.
3. After unit is in operation, inspect for moisture in system and check charge.

7.13 EVAPORATOR COIL & HEATER ASSEMBLY

The evaporator section, including the evaporator coil, should be cleaned regularly. The preferred cleaning fluid is
fresh water or steam. Another recommended cleaner is Oakite 202 or similar, following manufacturer’s instructions.
The two drain pan hoses are routed behind the condenser fan motor and compressor. The drain pan line(s) must
be open to ensure adequate drainage.

7.13.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement

1. Pump unit down. (Refer to Section 7.4).

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

T-365 7–16
 2. With power OFF and power plug removed, remove the screws securing the panel covering the evaporator
section (upper panel).
3. Disconnect the defrost heater wiring.
4. Remove the mounting hardware from the coil.
5. Unsolder the two coil connections, one at the distributor and the other at the coil header.
6. Disconnect the defrost temperature sensor (refer to Section 7.25) from the coil.
7. Remove middle coil support.
8. After defective coil is removed from unit, remove defrost heaters and install on replacement coil.
9. Install coil assembly by reversing above steps.
10.Leak check connections. Evacuate and add refrigerant charge.

7.13.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement

The heaters are wired directly back to the contactor and if a heater failure occurs during a trip, the heater set con-
taining that heater may be disconnected at the contactor.
The next Pre-trip (P1) will detect that a heater set has been disconnected and indicate that the failed heater should
be replaced. To remove a heater, do the following:

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

1. Before servicing unit, make sure the circuit breakers (CB-1 and CB-2) and start-stop switch (ST) are in the
OFF position, and the power plug is disconnected.
2. Remove the upper back panel.
3. Determine which heater(s) need replacing by checking resistance of each heater set. Refer to Section 3.3
for heater resistance values. Once the set containing the failed heater is determined, cut the splice connec-
tion and retest to determine the actual failed heater(s).
4. Remove hold-down clamp securing heater(s) to coil.
5. Lift the bent end of the heater (with the opposite end down and away from coil). Move heater to the side
enough to clear the heater end support and remove.

To replace a heater, perform steps 1 through 5 in reverse.

Figure 7.13 Heater Arrangement

Heater Element Bracket

Retainer

7.14 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY

The evaporator fans circulate air throughout the container by pulling air in the top of the unit. The air is forced
through the evaporator coil where it is either heated or cooled and then discharged out the bottom of the refrigera-
tion unit into the container. The fan motor bearings are factory lubricated and do not require additional grease.

7–17 T-365
7.14.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.
1. Remove access panel by removing mounting bolts and TIR locking device. Reach inside of unit and remove the
Ty-Rap securing the wire harness loop. Disconnect the connector by twisting to unlock and pulling to separate.
2. Loosen four 1/4-20 clamp bolts that are located on the underside of the fan deck at the sides of the fan
assembly. Slide the loosened clamps back from the fan assembly.
3. Slide the fan assembly out from the unit and place on a sturdy work surface.

7.14.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly

1. Attach a spanner wrench to the two 1/4-20 holes located in the fan hub. Loosen the 5/8-18 shaft nut by hold-
ing the spanner wrench stationary and turning the 5/8-18 nut counter-clockwise (see Figure 7.14).
2. Remove the spanner wrench. Use a universal wheel puller and remove the fan from the shaft. Remove the
washers and key.
3. Remove the four 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts that are located under the fan that support the motor and stator
housing. Remove the motor and plastic spacer.

7.14.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly

1. Assemble the motor and plastic spacer onto the stator.

NOTICE
When removing the black nylon evaporator fan blade, care must be taken to assure that the
blade is not damaged. In the past, it was a common practice to insert a screwdriver between
the fan blades to keep it from turning. This practice can no longer be used, as the blade is
made up of a material that will be damaged. It is recommended that an impact wrench be used
when removing the blade. Do not use the impact wrench when reinstalling, as galling of the
stainless steel shaft can occur.
2. Apply Loctite to the 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts and torque to 0.81 mkg (70 inch-pounds).
3. Place one 5/8 flat washer on the shoulder of the fan motor shaft. Insert the key in the keyway and lubricate
the fan motor shaft and threads with a graphite-oil solution (such as Never-seez).
4. Install the fan onto the motor shaft. Place one 5/8 flat washer with a 5/8-18 locknut onto the motor shaft and
torque to 40 foot-pounds.
Figure 7.14 Evaporator Fan Assembly

Washer Nut
Fan

Screws, Washers
Stator

Protector

Motor

T-365 7–18
 5. Install the evaporator fan assembly in reverse order of removal. Torque the four 1/4-20 clamp bolts to 0.81
mkg (70 inch-pounds). Connect the wiring connector.
6. Replace access the panel making sure that the panel does not leak. Make sure that the TIR locking device is
lockwired.

7.15 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING

Containers and Container units that are exposed to certain fumigants may develop visible surface corrosion. This
corrosion will show up as a white powder found on the inside of the container and on the reefer unit evaporator sta-
tor and fan deck.
Analyses by Carrier Transicold environmental specialists have identified the white powder as consisting predomi-
nantly of aluminum oxide. Aluminum oxide is a coarse crystalline deposit most likely the result of surface corrosion
on the aluminum parts within the container. If left untreated over time, it may build up in thickness and eventually
flake as a lightweight white powder.
The surface corrosion of aluminum is brought about by exposure to chemicals such as sulfur dioxide and possibly
other fumigants that are commonly used for fumigation and protection of some perishable cargo such as grapes,
for example. Fumigation is the process by which a chemical is released into an enclosed area to eliminate infesta-
tions of insects, termites, rodents, weeds and soil-born disease.
Typically any aluminum oxide that becomes detached from evaporator fan stators will be blown into the wet evapo-
rator coil where it will be caught and then flushed out of the unit during routine defrost cycles.
However, it is still highly recommended that after carrying cargo subject to fumigation procedures, that the inside of
the unit be thoroughly cleansed prior to reuse.
Carrier Transicold has identified a fully biodegradable and environmentally safe alkaline cleaning agent (Tri-
Pow’r® HD) for the unit. This will assist in helping to remove the corrosive fumigation chemicals and dislodging of
the corrosive elements.
This cleaner is available from the Carrier Transicold Performance Parts Group (PPG) and can be ordered through
any of the PPG locations; Part Number NU4371-88.
As a general safety precaution, before using this product, refer to and retain the Material Safety Data (MSDS)
sheet. This document can be found at:
www.nucalgon.com/products/coil_cleaners_tripower.htm

Prior to Cleaning:
• Always wear goggles, gloves and work boots.
• Avoid contact with skin and clothing, and avoid breathing mists.
• When mixing, add water to the sprayer first, then the cleaner.
• ALWAYS provide for proper ventilation when cleaning indoor evaporator coils (rear doors must be open).
• Be aware of surroundings - food, plants, etc., and the potential for human exposure.
• Always read directions and follow recommended dilution ratios. More is not always better. Using non-diluted
cleaner is not recommended.

Cleaning Procedure:
1. Remove the upper evaporator access panel inside of the unit.
2. Spray the surface with water before applying the cleaning solution. This helps the cleaner work better.
3. Liberally apply the prepared cleaner solution (5 parts water and 1 part cleaner).
4. Allow the cleaner to soak in for 5 to 7 minutes.
5. Assess area for rinsing. Follow all local regulations regarding disposal of waste water.
6. Thoroughly rinse the cleaner and surrounding area, floor, etc. When rinsing where heavy foaming solution is
present, it is very important to take the time to thoroughly rinse the equipment and surroundings.
7. Always rinse the empty coil cleaner bottle, cap tightly and dispose of properly.

7–19 T-365
7.16 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
The electronic expansion valve (EEV) is an automatic device which maintains required superheat of the refrigerant
gas leaving the evaporator. The valve functions are: (a) automatic response of refrigerant flow to match the evapo-
rator load and (b) prevention of liquid refrigerant entering the compressor. Unless the valve is defective, it seldom
requires any maintenance.

7.16.1 Replacing Electronic Expansion Valve and Strainer

Removing an EEV:

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

1. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves.

2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.

3. Remove coil.

4. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of removing the valve is to cut the connection between the brazed
section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove valve.

Alternately, use a wet rag to keep valve cool. Heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and remove
valve.

5. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary.

Installing an EEV; Reverse steps 1 through 4 above to install a new valve.

1. Install the valve and a new strainer with the cone of strainer / screen pointing into liquid line at the inlet to the
valve.

2. During installation, make sure the EEV coil is snapped down fully, and the coil retention tab is properly
seated in one of the valve body dimples. Also, ensure that coil boot is properly fitted over valve body. See
Figure 7.15.

Figure 7.15 Electronic Expansion Valve

Coil
Boot

Coil

Electronic
Expansion
Valve

FLOW
DIRECTION

Strainer

3. Replace filter drier.

4. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing vacuum pump on liquid line and suction service valve.

T-365 7–20
 5. Open liquid line service valve and check refrigerant level.

6. Check superheat. (Refer to Section 3.2).

7. Check unit operation by running Pre-trip (Refer to Section 5.8).

7.17 ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE

Figure 7.16 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)

Slotted Screw

Top Coil (Small) O-Ring

Solenoid Coil, Enclosing Tube

and Body
%RWWRP&RLOODUJH2íULQJ

Brass Spacer

Removing a Solenoid Valve Coil:

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

1. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit. Disconnect leads.
2. Remove top screw and o-ring. Remove coil and save mounting hardware, seals and spacer for reuse. (See
Figure 7.16). Refer to step d. for valve coil replacement.

b. Removing the Solenoid Valve:

1. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves.
2. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of removing the solenoid valve is to cut the connection between
the brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove valve. Alternately, heat inlet and outlet
connections to valve body and remove valve.
3. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary.

c. Installing the Solenoid Valve:

1. Fit the new solenoid valve into position and braze. Use a wet rag to keep valve cool whenever brazing.

d. Installing the Solenoid Valve Coil:

1. Install the brass spacer on the valve stem.
2. Lubricate both o-rings with silicone provided in the kit.
3. Install bottom coil o-ring on the valve stem.
4. Install the solenoid coil on the valve stem.
5. Place the top coil o-ring on the coil mounting screw and secure the coil to the valve using a torque wrench.
Torque the screw to 25 in-lbs.
6. Connect coil wires using butt-splices and heat-shrink tubing.

7–21 T-365
7.18 ECONOMIZER EXPANSION VALVE
The economizer expansion valve is an automatic device that maintains constant superheat of the refrigerant gas
leaving at the point of bulb attachment, regardless of suction pressure.
Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires maintenance other than periodic inspection to ensure that the ther-
mal bulb is tightly secured to the suction line and wrapped with insulating compound.

7.18.1 Economizer Expansion Replacement

Figure 7.17 Economizer Expansion Valve

Inlet

Outlet

1. Removing the Economizer Expansion Valve:

NOTICE
The economizer expansion valve is a hermetic valve, it does not have adjustable superheat (See
Figure 7.17).

a. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves.
Evacuate if unit is not equipped with service valves. Refer to Section 7.6.
b. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
c. Remove cushion clamps located on the inlet and outlet lines.
d. Remove insulation (Presstite) from expansion valve bulb.
e. Unstrap the bulb, located on the economizer line.
f. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of removing the valve is to cut the connection between the
brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove valve. Alternately, use a wet rag to keep
valve cool. Heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and remove valve.
g. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary.

2. Installing the Economizer Expansion Valve:

a. The economizer expansion valve should be wrapped in a soaked cloth for brazing.
b. Braze inlet connection to inlet line.
c. Braze outlet connection to outlet line.
d. Reinstall the cushion clamps on inlet and outlet lines.
3. Replace filter drier, (Refer to Section 7.12).
4. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing vacuum pump on liquid line and suction service valve.
5. Check economizer expansion valve superheat (see Section 3.2).

T-365 7–22
7.19 TROUBLESHOOTING P6-7 (DLV/DUV)

7.19.1 Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)

A failed digital unloader valve (DUV), which is normally closed,) or an internal seal failure of the compressor can
result in the unit running continually in the fully loaded mode causing it to undershoot its set point temperature.
Both of these can be checked out by running pre-trip test P6-7. When running P6-7, the controller is looking for the
differences in pressure and current draw between loaded mode and unloaded mode to make a judgment. If there
are no differences, then it will show fail.
To confirm which what has caused the test to fail, perform the following additional test.
1. Connect manifold gauge set to discharge and suction service valves.
2. Front seat the SSV and pump down the compressor.
3. Front seat the discharge Service Valve.
4. Disconnect DUV from the top of compressor and cap the compressor fitting with the fitting removed from the
service valve.
5. Using R134, pressurize the line to 50 psi (3.45 bar) at the suction service valve connection and check for
leaks at the DUV outlet fitting at the compressor.
6. Energize DUV by placing a magnet on the valve stem opening the valve. Pressure will drop.

If a magnet is not available, a jumper procedure can be used as follows:

1. Remove all 4 controller fuses (F1, F2, F3a, F3b).
2. Remove the KA6 wire from KA controller connector on the front of the controller.
3. Disconnect the X1 wire from the 24VAC side of transformer (black wire) and locate it away from the trans-
former.
4. Jumper between the black transformer wires to the KA6 wire removed from the connector.
5. Connect power to unit and turn circuit breaker on (DUV coil is now energized).
6. Pressure should drop.
7. Power circuit breaker off, reconnect wires and reinstall fuses.

If the valve opens and closes properly, the failure mode is with the compressor and it should be changed at the
earliest opportunity.

7.19.2 Digital Loader Valve and Unloader Valve (DLV/DUV)

The EDGE model also has a digital loader valve (DLV normally closed). A failed digital loader valve will result in the
unit’s inability to cool due to a reduction in refrigerant flow where a failed digital unloader valve / DUV (normally
closed) will result in the unit undershooting its set point due to its inability to unload the compressor.
Both of these valves can be checked out by running pre-trip test P6-7. If pre-trip test P6-7 fails then the following
checks need to be made to identify which of the valves has failed.
1. Connect manifold gauge set to Discharge and Suction service valves. Refer to Section 7.2.
2. Using Code 41, Service function, Valve Override Control as follows:
a. Set the tIM (Override Time to ~5 minutes)
b. Set the PCnt: Detailed below
c. Display Code 03, Compressor Motor Current value

By monitoring the compressor amperage and pressure, the technician can determine which component has failed.
Set the PCnt (100%setting – DLV Capacity TEST)
If the compressor is able to load, the compressor amperage and the discharge pressure will rise and the suction
pressure will drop – DLV is okay. If discharge pressure does not rise, the DLV should be replaced.
The Digital Loader Valve Solenoid coil cycles: 0 to 0.6 amp DC (AC/DC current clamp)

7–23 T-365
Set the PCnt (20%setting – DUV Modulation TEST).
If the compressor is able to unload, the compressor amperage and discharge pressure drops and the suction
pressure will climb – DUV is okay. If the discharge pressure does not decrease after the valve energizes,
replace the DUV.
Unloader Valve Solenoid coil cycles: 0 to 0.4 amp AC (AC/DC current clamp)

7.20 DIGITAL LOADER VALVE

7.20.1 Digital Loader Valve Replacement
1. Removing the DLV:
a. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves. In
the event the DLV is stuck open and compressor cannot pump down, remove charge.

! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or dis-
charge service valves closed (frontseated). Internal damage will result from operating the com-
pressor in a deep vacuum.
b. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
c. Loosen bolt on top of the DLV and remove coil assembly.

NOTICE
There is a small spacer tube between the top of the valve and the 12 VDC coil that needs to be
reinstalled into the solenoid valve coil. When removing the coil, it may fall out when lifted from the
valve body. Take care that the spacer is not lost; the valve will not function correctly without it.
d. Remove clamps holding the DLV to the discharge line.
e. Loosen the nuts attaching the DLV to the top of the compressor.
f. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of removing the solenoid valve is to cut the connection
between the brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove valve.
Alternately, use a wet rag to keep valve cool. Heat outlet connection to valve body and remove valve.
g. Examine compressor and service valves. Ensure that the o-ring is not stuck in the gland of the valve.
h. Discard the o-ring on the o-ring face seal connection.
2. Installing the DLV:
a. Lubricate the gland shoulder area and o-ring with refrigerant oil.
b. Fit new valve in position and hand-tighten the o-ring nut.
c. Use a wet rag to keep valve cool while brazing. Braze DLV to service valve connection.
d. Reinstall and tighten the brackets that secure the valve body to the discharge line.
e. Torque o-ring face seal connections to 18 to 20 ft-lbs.
f. Install the coil onto the valve body and tighten the attachment bolt.

NOTICE
Confirm that the small spacer tube is inserted into the coil prior to attaching it to the valve
body. The valve will not function correctly without it.
g. Leak check and evacuate low side of unit as applicable. Refer to Section 7.6.
h. Open service valves.

T-365 7–24
7.20.2 Digital Loader Installation
1. Power unit off and lock/tag out to prevent inadvertent power up.
2. Remove 8 bolts from guard under control box and remove guard.
3. Remove the digital unloader valve coil (DUV) and place a magnet tool on the valve to open it. If a magnet is
not available perform the Jumper procedure:
a. Remove all 4 controller fuses (F1, F2, F3a, F3b).
b. Remove the wire from the KA6 connector on the front of the controller.
c. Disconnect the X1 wire from the 24VAC side of transformer (black wire) and locate it away for the transformer.
d. Jumper the black transformer wire to the KA6 wire removed from the connector.
e. Connect power to unit and turn circuit breaker on (DUV coil is now energized).
4. Connect a refrigerant recovery machine and recover refrigerant from the unit. (refer to the recovery
machines Operation and Service manual for proper procedures).
5. If jumper procedure was used for the recovery, turn the circuit breaker off and disconnect the power. Follow
the regional lock out tag out procedure for electrical.
6. Isolate valve by removing wire type wraps and conduit. Save any removed conduit for re-installation.
7. Remove top screw from the valve coil removing the coil and spacer. Ensure to retain the spacer as it is
required for proper operation of the valve. Position coil away from valve body.
8. Using a tubing cutter cut the DLV refrigerant line as marked in Figure 7.18.

Figure 7.18 DLV Installation

DUV
Step 9 DLV Step 8
Step
8

Wet Rag All Areas

Prior to Brazing

9. Unbolt the valve from the mounting bracket and remove the valve assembly from the unit.
10.Clean pipework stubs on both unit and valve assembly in preparation for brazing.
11. Refit valve coil to the valve body ensuring the spacer ring is in place.
12.Slide new valve assembly into place, coupling the refrigerant lines.
13.Attach the solenoid coil to the mounting bracket of the new valve body and tighten.
14. Wet rag valve body and bracket mounting clamp. Failure to wet rag the body may result in the failure of the valve.
15.Using silver solder braze both bell connections.
16.Replace the filter drier.
17.With magnet still on the DUV stem, evacuate the compressor to 1000 Microns. If jumper procedure was
used in step 3, reconnect unit to power and turn on the circuit breaker to again power the DUV.
18.On completion of the vacuum, remove the magnet and reinstall the DUV coil. If a jumper was used, turn off
the circuit breaker and disconnect power. Remove jumper and reconnect the X1 wire to the black trans-
former wire. Reinstall and secure the KA6 wire to the KA plug at the controller.

7–25 T-365
 19.Weigh the proper refrigerant charge into the unit as per the units operation and service manual and perform
a leak check of the system.
20.Replace the guard under the control box.
21.If changed under the units warranty, tag part with unit information and cause of failure.
22.If possible collect unit data download for future failure analysis.

7.21 DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE

7.21.1 Digital Unloader Replacement

1. Power unit off and lock out / tag out to prevent inadvertent power up. Follow the regional lock out tag out pro-
cedure for electrical system.
2. Remove 8 bolts from guard under control box and remove guard.
3. Remove the digital unloader valve coil (DUV) and place a magnet tool on the valve to open it. If a magnet is
not available perform the Jumper procedure:
a. Remove all 4 controller fuses (F1, F2, F3a, F3b).
b. Remove the wire from the KA6 connector on the front of the controller.
c. Disconnect the X1 wire from the 24VAC side of transformer (black wire) and locate it away for the trans-
former.
d. Jumper the black transformer wire to the KA6 wire removed from the connector.
e. Connect power to unit and turn circuit breaker on (DUV coil is now energized).
4. Using a refrigerant recovery machine, remove the refrigerant from the unit. Refer to the Operation and Ser-
vice manual of the selected recovery machine for proper procedures.
5. On completion of the recovery, if the jumper procedure was used turn the circuit breaker off and disconnect
the power. Follow the regional lock out tag out procedure for electrical system.
6. Remove insulation from suction line to prevent damage while brazing.
7. If coil was not removed in step three, remove the top screw from DUV coil and remove coil. Position coil
away from valve body.
8. Cut the cable tie for the compressor dome temperature sensor and move wiring to one side.
9. Using a tubing cutter, cut the lines marked at locations in Figure 7.19.

Figure 7.19 DUV Installation

DLV Cut

DUV

SSV

Wet Rag All Areas

Prior to Brazing

Cut above Bell. Unïbraze, sliding the tubing

out of the bell on the service valve.

T-365 7–26
 10.Remove the unloader connection to the compressor. Discard the O-ring as it will be replaced. Ensure that
the O-ring is not left attached to the compressor connection.
11. Remove the DUV coil to bracket mounting screws.
12.Slide the bracket assembly out (right and forwards between suction and discharge lines).
13.Wet wrap the suction service valve and Un-braze the remaining section of line to the bell connection at the
suction service valve.
14.Clean pipework stubs on both unit and valve assembly in preparation for brazing.
15.Install coil onto the replacement valve stem and slide into place.
16.Loosely couple the refrigerant connections and secure the coil to the mounting bracket.
17.Lubricate the gland shoulder area and O-ring (42-00243-04) with refrigerant oil and fit the economizer con-
nection to the compressor.
18.Re-secure the coil to the bracket.
19.Torque unloader connection to the compressor 24.5 to 27 Nm (18 to 20 ft-lbs).
20.Insert heat shield behind the two braze points.
21.Wet rag both the DUV, DLV and the suction service valve bodies and clamp. Failure to wet rag the body and
mounts body may result in future failure. Using silver solder braze both connections.
22.Replace the filter drier.
23.If magnet was used in step 3; remove the DUV coil and place magnet on the stem to open the valve for
evacuation. If jumper procedure was used in step 3, reconnect unit to power and turn on the circuit breaker
to again power the DUV.
24.Evacuate the unit to 1000 Microns.
25.On completion of the vacuum, remove the magnet and reinstall the DUV coil. If a jumper was used, turn off
the circuit breaker and disconnect power. Remove jumper and reconnect the X1 wire to the black trans-
former wire. Reinstall and secure the KA6 wire to the KA plug at the controller.
26.Weigh the proper refrigerant charge into the unit as per the units operation and service manual and perform
a leak check of the system.
27.Reposition and secure the wires and suction line insulation.
28.Replace the guard under the control box.
29.If changed under the units warranty, tag part with unit information and cause of failure.
30.If possible collect unit data download for future failure analysis.

7.22 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS

Controller function code Cd41 is a configurable code that allows timed operation of the automatic valves for trou-
bleshooting. Test sequences are provided in Table 7–1. Capacity mode (CAP) allows alignment of the economizer
solenoid valve in the standard and economized operating configurations. DLV and DUV Capacity Modulation,%
Setting (PCnt) and Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) allows opening of the digital unloader valve and electronic
expansion valve, respectively, to various percentages. If the unit is equipped with an LIV, the Liquid Valve Setting
allows the LIV to be automatically controlled, or manually opened and closed.
The Override Timer (tIM) selection is also provided to enter a time period of up to five minutes, during which the over-
ride(s) are active. If the timer is active, valve override selections will take place immediately. If the timer is not active,
changes will not take place for a few seconds after the timer is started. When the timer times out, the override function
is automatically terminated and the valves return to normal machinery control. To operate the override:

1. Press the CODE SELECT key then press an ARROW key until Cd41 is displayed in the left window. The
right window will display a controller communications code.

2. Press the ENTER key. The left display will show a test name alternating with the test setting or time remaining.
Use an ARROW key to scroll to the desired test. Press the ENTER key, SELCt will appear in the left display.

7–27 T-365
 3. Use an ARROW key to scroll to the desired setting, and then press the ENTER key. Selections available for
each of the tests are provided in Table 7-1.

4. If the timer is not operating, follow the above procedure to display the timer. Use an ARROW key to scroll to
the desired time interval and press ENTER to start the timer.

5. The above described sequence may be repeated during the timer cycle to change to another override.

6. The above described sequence may be repeated during the timer cycle to change to another override.

Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays

Left Display Controller Communications Codes Setting Codes (Right Display)
(Right Display)
0 00 (0 minutes/0 Seconds)
tIM
In 30 second increments to
(Override Timer)
5 00 (5 minutes/ 0 seconds)
AUtO
(Normal Machinery Control)
036
PCnt
10
(% Setting - DLV/DUV Capacity)
25
50
100
AUtO
(Normal Machinery Control)
Cd 41/SELCt CLOSE (Closed)
EEV 036
(% Setting - Electronic Expansion Valve) 10
25
50
100
AUtO
(Normal Control)
Std
CAP
UnLd
(Capacity Mode)
(Economizer = Closed)
ECOn
(Economizer = Open)

7.23 AUTOTRANSFORMER
If the unit does not start, check the following:
1. Make sure the 460 VAC (yellow) power cable is plugged into the receptacle (see Figure 7.20) and locked in
place.
2. Make sure that circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 are in the “ON” position. If the circuit breakers do not hold in,
check voltage supply.
3. There is no internal protector for this transformer design, therefore, no checking of the internal protector is
required.
4. Using a voltmeter, and with the primary supply circuit ON, check the primary (input) voltage (460 VAC). Next,
check the secondary (output) voltage (230 VAC). The transformer is defective if output voltage is not avail-
able.

T-365 7–28
 Figure 7.20 Autotransformer

460 VAC Power

Circuit Breaker (CB-2) Receptacle
230-Volt

Dual Voltage
Modular
Autotransformer

7.24 CONTROLLER

7.24.1 Handling Modules

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from module unless you are grounded to the unit frame with a
static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all module connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.

The guidelines and cautions provided herein should be followed when handling the modules. These precautions
and procedures should be implemented when replacing a module, when doing any arc welding on the unit, or when
service to the refrigeration unit requires handling and removal of a module.
1. Obtain a grounding wrist strap (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00304-00) and a static dissipation mat (Carrier
Transicold P/N 07-00277-00). The wrist strap, when properly grounded, will dissipate any potential static
buildup on the body. The dissipation mat will provide a static-free work surface on which to place and/or ser-
vice the modules.
2. Disconnect and secure power to the unit.
3. Place strap on wrist and attach the ground end to any exposed unpainted metal area on the refrigeration unit
frame (bolts, screws, etc.).
4. Carefully remove the module. Do not touch any of the electrical connections if possible. Place the module on
the static mat.
5. The strap should be worn during any service work on a module, even when it is placed on the mat.

7.24.2 Controller Troubleshooting

A group of test points (TP, see Figure 7.21) are provided on the controller for troubleshooting electrical circuits
(see schematic diagram, Section 8). A description of the test points follows:

NOTICE
Use a digital voltmeter to measure AC voltage between TP’s and ground (TP9), except for TP8.

7–29 T-365
TP 1 - Not used in this application.
TP 2 - Enables the user to check if the high pressure switch (HPS) is open or closed.
TP 3 - Enables the user to check if the water pressure switch (WP) contact is open or closed.
TP 4 - Enables the user to check for power availability to the DUV contact TD.
TP 5 - Enables the user to check if the internal protectors for the evaporator fan motors (IP-EM1 or IP-EM2) are
open or closed.
TP 6 (IF EQUIPPED) - Enables the user to check if the controller liquid injection valve relay (TQ) is open or closed.
TP 7 - Enables the user to check if the controller economizer solenoid valve relay (TS) is open or closed.
TP 8 - Not used in this application.
TP 9 - The chassis (unit frame) ground connection.
TP 10 - Enables the user to check if the heat termination thermostat (HTT) contact is open or closed.

Figure 7.21 Controller Section of the Control Box

Mounting Screw Controller

Controller Software Test

Programming Port Points

7.24.3 Controller Programming Procedure

! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.

1. Turn unit OFF, via start-stop switch (ST).

2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card containing the following (example) files into the programming/
software port. (See Figure 7.21):
menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select a file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
3. Turn unit ON, via start-stop switch (ST).

T-365 7–30
7.24.4 Programming Procedure for Software Versions 5354 & Greater With Updated Menu Option
(menu0115.ml)

NOTICE
Units must be loaded with software version 5354 or higher. See the label in the control box
door for factory installed software version. The updated menu option allows the operational
software to be loaded, and time and container identification to beset.

Procedure for loading Operational Software:

1. The display module will display the message Set UP.
2. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until the display reads, LOAd 53XX for Scroll.
3. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
4. The display will alternate to between PrESS EntR and rEV XXXX.
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
6. The display will show the message “Pro SoFt”. This message will last for up to one minute.
7. The display module will go blank briefly, then read “Pro donE” when the software loading has loaded. (If a
problem occurs while loading the software: the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.” Turn
start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
8. Turn unit OFF, via start-stop switch (ST).
9. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming/software port and return the unit to normal operation by
placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.
10.Turn power on and wait about 15 seconds for the new software to load into the controller memory. The sta-
tus LED will flash quickly and the display will remain blank as the controller loads the new software.

When complete, the controller will reset and power up normally.

11. Wait for default display, setpoint on the left, and control temperature on the right.
12.Confirm software is correct using keypad code select 18 to view Cd18 XXXX.
13.Turn power off. Operational software is loaded.

Procedure for Loading Configuration Software:

1. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card containing the following (example) files into the programming/
software port. (See Figure 7.21): menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select the file/program to
upload into the controller. cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
3. Turn unit ON using start-stop switch (ST).
4. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display reads Set UP.
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
6. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display reads XXXX the message ruN COnFG. (If a defective card is
being used the display will blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
7. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
8. The display module will go blank briefly and then display “551 00”, based on the operational software
installed.
9. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll through the list to obtain the proper model dash number. (If a
defective card is being used, the display will blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and
remove the card.)
10.Press the ENTER key on the keypad.

7–31 T-365
 11. When software loading has successfully completed, the display will show the message “EEPrM donE.” (If a
problem occurs while loading the software, the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.” Turn
start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.) 12.Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
12.Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming/software port and return the unit to normal operation by
placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.
13.Confirm correct model configuration using the keypad to choose code 20 (CD20). The model displayed
should match the unit serial number plate.

Procedure for Setting the Date and Time:

1. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display reads Set TIM.

2. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.

3. The first value to be modified is the date in YYYY MM-DD format. The values will be entered from right to
left. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to increase or decrease the values. The ENTER key will enter the
information for the current field and move to the next value; the CODE SELECT key will allow modification of
the previous value.

4. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.

5. The next value to be modified is the time in HH MM format. The values will be entered from right to left.
Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to increase or decrease the values. The ENTER key will enter the
information for the current field and move to the next value; the CODE SELECT key will allow modification of
the previous value.

6. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. The date and time will not be committed until start up procedures are
completed on the next power up.

Procedure for Setting the Container ID:

NOTICE
The characters will be preset to the container ID already on the controller. If none exist, the
default will be AAAA0000000.

1. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display reads Set ID.
2. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
3. Values will be entered from right to left. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to increase or decrease the
values. ENTER will enter the information for the current field and move to the next value; CODE SELECT
will allow modification of the previous value.
4. When the last value is entered, press the ENTER key to enter the information to the controller; the CODE
SELECT key will allow modification of the previous value.

7.24.5 Removing and Installing a Controller

Removal:
1. Disconnect all front wire harness connectors and move wiring out of way.
2. The lower controller mounting is slotted, loosen the top mounting screw (see Figure 7.21) and lift up and out.
3. Disconnect the back connectors and remove module.
4. When removing the replacement module from its packaging, note how it is packaged. When returning the
old module for service, place it in the packaging in the same manner as the replacement. The packaging has
been designed to protect the module from both physical and electrostatic discharge damage during storage
and transit.

T-365 7–32
Installation:
Install the module by reversing the removal steps.
Torque values for mounting screws (see Figure 7.21) are 0.23 mkg (20 inch-pounds). Torque value for the con-
nectors is 0.12 mkg (10 inch-pounds).

7.24.6 Battery Replacement

Standard Battery Location (Standard Cells):

1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Slide bracket out and remove old batteries. (See Figure 4.4, Item 8.)
3. Install new batteries and slide bracket into control box slot.

! CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid nicking or cutting wires.

Standard Battery Location (Rechargeable Cells):

1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Disconnect battery wire connector from control box.
3. Slide out and remove old battery and bracket. (See Figure 4.4, Item 8.)
4. Slide new battery pack and bracket into the control box slot.
5. Reconnect battery wire connector to control box and replace wire ties that were removed.

Secure Battery Option (Rechargeable Cells Only):

1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Open control box door and remove both the high voltage shield and clear plastic rain shield (if installed).
3. Disconnect the battery wires from the “KA” plug positions 14, 13, 11.
4. Using Driver Bit, Carrier Transicold part number 07-00418-00, remove the 4 screws securing the display
module to the control box. Disconnect the ribbon cable and set the display module aside.

NOTICE
The battery wires must face toward the right.

5. Remove the old battery from the bracket and clean bracket surface. Remove the protective backing from the
new battery and assemble to the bracket. Secure battery by inserting the wire tie from the back of the
bracket around the battery, and back through the bracket.
6. Reconnect the ribbon cable to display and re-install the display.
7. Route the battery wires from the battery along the display harness and connect the red battery wire and one
end of the red jumper to “KA14,” the other end of the red jumper wire to “KA11,” and the black wire to
“KA13.”
8. Replace wire ties that were removed.

7.25 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE

Service procedures for the return recorder, return temperature, supply recorder, supply temperature, ambient,
defrost temperature, evaporator temperature, and compressor discharge temperature sensors are provided in the
following sub paragraphs.

7–33 T-365
7.25.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure
To verify the accuracy of a temperature sensor:
1. Remove the sensor and place in a 0°C (32°F) ice-water bath. The ice-water bath is prepared by filling an
insulated container (of sufficient size to completely immerse bulb) with ice cubes or chipped ice, then filling
voids between ice with water and agitating until mixture reaches 0°C (32°F) measured on a laboratory ther-
mometer.
2. Start unit and check sensor reading on the control panel. The reading should be 0°C (32°F). If the reading is
correct, reinstall sensor; if it is not, continue with the following.
3. Turn unit OFF and disconnect power supply.
4. Refer to Section 7.24 and remove controller to gain access to the sensor plugs.
5. Using the plug connector marked “EC” that is connected to the back of the controller, locate the sensor wires
(RRS, RTS, SRS, STS, AMBS, DTS, or CPDS as required). Follow those wires to the connector and using
the pins of the plug, measure the resistance. Values are provided in Table 7–2 and Table 7–3.
Due to the variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters, thermometers or other test equipment, a reading
within 2% of the chart value would indicate a good sensor. If a sensor is defective, the resistance reading will
usually be much higher or lower than the resistance values given.

T-365 7–34
 Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance
Sensors AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS
C F Ohms C F Ohms C F Ohms C F Ohms
-40 −40 336,500 −7.8 18 49,060 24.4 76 10,250 56.7 134 2,809
-38.9 −38 312,600 −6.7 20 46,230 25.6 78 9,760 57.8 136 2,697
−37.8 −36 290,600 −5.6 22 43,580 26.7 80 9,299 58.9 138 2,590
−36.7 −34 270,300 −4.4 24 41,100 27.8 82 8,862 60.0 140 2,488
−35.6 −32 251,500 −3.3 26 38,780 28.9 84 8,449 61.1 142 2,390
−34.4 −30 234,200 −2.2 28 36,600 30.0 86 8,057 62.2 144 2,297
−33.3 −28 218,200 −1.1 30 34,560 31.1 88 7,686 63.3 146 2,208
−32.2 −26 203,400 0 32 32,650 32.2 90 7,334 64.4 148 2,124
−31.1 −24 189,700 1.1 34 30,850 33.3 92 7,000 65.6 150 2,042
−30 −22 177,000 2.2 36 29,170 34.4 94 6,684 68.3 155 1,855
−28.9 −20 165,200 3.3 38 27,590 35.6 96 6,384 71.1 160 1,687
−27.8 −18 154,300 4.4 40 26,100 36.7 98 6,099 73.9 165 1,537
−26.7 −16 144,200 5.5 42 24,700 37.8 100 5,828 76.7 170 1,402
−25.6 −14 134,800 6.6 44 23,390 38.9 102 5,571 79.4 175 1,281
−24.4 −12 126,100 7.7 46 22,160 40.0 104 5,327 82.2 180 1,171
−23.3 −10 118,100 8.9 48 20,990 41.1 106 5,095 85.0 185 1,072
−22.2 −8 110,500 10 50 19,900 42.2 108 4,874 87.8 190 983
−21.1 −6 103,600 11.1 52 18,870 43.3 110 4,665 90.6 195 902
−20 −4 97,070 12.2 54 17,900 44.4 112 4,465 93.3 200 829
−18.9 −2 91,030 13.3 56 16,980 45.5 114 4,275 96.1 205 762
−17.8 0 85,400 14.4 58 16,120 46.7 116 4,095 98.9 210 702
−16.7 2 80,160 15.5 60 15,310 47.8 118 3,923 101.7 215 647
−15.6 4 75,270 16.6 62 14,540 48.9 120 3,759 104.4 220 598
−14.4 6 70,720 17.7 64 13,820 50.0 122 3,603 107.2 225 553
−13.3 8 66,460 18.9 66 13,130 51.1 124 3,454 110.0 230 511
−12.2 10 62,500 20.0 68 12,490 52.2 126 3,313 112.8 235 473
−11.1 12 58,790 21.1 70 11,880 53.3 128 3,177 115.6 240 438
−10.0 14 55,330 22.2 72 11,310 54.4 130 3,049 118.3 245 406
−8.9 16 52,090 23.3 74 10,760 55.6 132 2,926 121.1 250 378

7–35 T-365
 Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance (CPDS)
Sensors CPDS
C F Ohms C F Ohms C F Ohms
-40 -40 2,889,600 38 100.4 49,656 116 240.8 3,759
-38 -36.4 2,532,872 40 104.0 45,812 118 244.4 3,550
-36 -32.8 2,225,078 42 107.6 42,294 120 248.0 3,354
-34 -29.2 1,957,446 44 111.2 39,078 122 251.6 3,173
-32 -25.6 1,724,386 46 114.8 36,145 124 255.2 3,004
-30 -22.0 1,522,200 48 118.4 33,445 126 258.8 2,850
-28 -18.4 1,345,074 50 122.0 30,985 128 262.4 2,711
-26 -14.8 1,190,945 52 125.6 28,724 130 266.0 2,580
-24 -11.2 1,056,140 54 129.2 26,651 132 269.6 2,454
-22 -7.6 938,045 56 132.8 27,750 134 273.2 2,335
-20 -4.0 834,716 58 136.4 23,005 136 276.8 2,223
-18 -0.4 743,581 60 140.0 21,396 138 280.4 2,119
-16 3.2 663,593 62 143.6 19,909 140 284.0 2,021
-14 6.8 593,030 64 147.2 18,550 142 287.6 1,928
-12 10.4 530,714 66 150.8 17,294 144 291.2 1,839
-10 14.0 475,743 68 154.4 16,133 146 294.8 1,753
-8 17.6 426,904 70 158.0 15,067 148 298.4 1,670
-6 21.2 383,706 72 161.6 14,078 150 302.0 1,591
-4 24.8 345,315 74 165.2 13,158 152 305.6 1,508
-2 28.4 311,165 76 168.8 12,306 154 309.2 1,430
0 32.0 280,824 78 172.4 11,524 156 312.8 1,362
2 35.6 253,682 80 176.0 10,793 158 316.4 1,302
4 39.2 229,499 82 179.6 10,122 160 320.0 1,247
6 42.8 207,870 84 183.2 9,494 162 323.6 1,193
8 46.4 188,494 86 186.8 8,918 164 327.2 1,142
10 50.0 171,165 88 190.4 8,376 166 330.8 1,096
12 53.6 155,574 90 194.0 7,869 168 334.4 1,054
14 57.2 141,590 92 197.6 7,404 170 338.0 1,014
16 60.8 129,000 94 201.2 6,972 172 341.6 975
18 64.4 117,656 96 204.8 6,571 174 345.2 938
20 68.0 107,439 98 208.4 6,197 176 348.8 902
22 71.6 98,194 100 212.0 5,848 178 352.4 867
24 75.2 89,916 102 215.6 5,529 180 356.0 834
26 78.8 82,310 104 219.2 5,233 182 359.6 798
28 82.4 75,473 106 222.8 4,953 184 363.2 764
30 83.0 69,281 108 226.4 4,692 186 366.8 733
32 89.6 63,648 110 230.0 4,446 188 370.4 706
34 93.2 58,531 112 233.6 4,204 190 374.0 697
36 96.8 53,887 114 237.2 3,977

T-365 7–36
7.25.2 Sensor Replacement

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breaker (CB-1) and disconnect main power supply before
removing electrical parts.

1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply

NOTICE
Include white date code label when cutting out and removing defective sensors. The label
could be required for warranty returns.

2. Cut cable. Slide the cap and grommet off a bulb type sensor and save for reuse. Do not cut the grommet.
3. Cut one wire of existing cable 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) shorter than the other wire.
4. Cut replacement sensor wires (opposite colors) back 40 mm (1-1/2 inches). (See Figure 7.22.)
5. Strip back insulation on all wiring 6.3 mm (1/4 inch).

Figure 7.22 Sensor Types

40 mm (1 1/2 in),
Sensor 2 or 3 wires as required

6.3 mm (1/4 in) Sensor 6.3 mm (1/4 in)

Mounting Stud Type Bulb Type

6. Slide a large piece of heat shrink tubing over the cable, and place the two small pieces of heat shrink tubing,
one over each wire, before adding crimp fittings as shown in Figure 7.23.

Figure 7.23 Sensor and Cable Splice

Sensor (Typical)

Large Heat Shrink Tubing (1)

Cable Heat Shrink Tubing, 2 or 3 as required

7. If required, slide the cap and grommet assembly onto the replacement sensor.
8. Slip crimp fittings over dressed wires (keeping wire colors together). Make sure wires are pushed into crimp
fittings as far as possible and crimp with crimping tool.
9. Solder spliced wires with a 60% tin and 40% lead Rosincore solder.
10.Slide heat shrink tubing over each splice so that ends of tubing cover both ends of crimp as shown in Figure
7.23.
11. Heat tubing to shrink over splice. Make sure all seams are sealed tightly against the wiring to prevent mois-
ture seepage.

7–37 T-365
 ! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance.

12.Slide large heat shrink tubing over both splices and shrink.
13.Position sensor in unit as shown in Figure 7.23 and re-check sensor resistance:
Figure 7.25 - Return Sensor Positioning
Figure 7.24 - Supply Sensor Positioning
Figure 7.26 - ETS Sensor Positioning

14.Reinstall sensor, refer to:

Section 7.25.3 - STS and SRS Re-Installation
Section 7.25.4 - RRS and RTS Re-Installation
Section 7.25.5 - DTS Re-Installation
Section 7.25.6 - ETS1 and ETS2 Re-Installation

NOTICE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to deactivate probe alarms (refer to Section 5.8).

7.25.3 Sensors STS and SRS Re-Installation

To properly position a unit supply sensor (Supply Temperature Sensor STS or Supply Recorder Sensor SRS),
the sensor must be fully inserted into the probe holder. This positioning will give the sensor the optimum amount of
exposure to the supply air stream, and will allow the Controller to operate correctly. Insufficient probe insertion into
the probe holder will result in poor temperature control due to the lack of air flow over the sensor.
It is also necessary to ensure that the probe tip does not contact the back panel. The design minimum clearance of
6 mm (1/4 inch) should be maintained (see Figure 7.24).

Figure 7.24 Supply Sensor Positioning

6HQVRU
:LUHV &DSDQG*URPPHW
$VVHPEO\
(YDSRUDWRU
%DFN3DQHO

3UREH
+ROGHU

6XSSO\
$LU
6WUHDP

6XSSO\6HQVRU

PP
LQFK

T-365 7–38
7.25.4 Sensors RRS and RTS Re-Installation
Reinstall the return sensor (Return Temperature Sensor RTS or Return Recorder Sensor RRS), as shown in Fig-
ure 7.25. For proper placement of the return sensor, be sure to position the enlarged positioning section of the sen-
sor against the side of the mounting clamp.

Figure 7.25 Return Sensor Positioning

Mounting Return
Clamp Sensor 1.50 in.
(38.1cm)

7.25.5 Sensor DTS Re-Installation

The Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) must have insulating material placed completely over the sensor to ensure
the coil metal temperature is sensed.

7.25.6 Sensors ETS1 and ETS2 Re-Installation

The Evaporator Temperature Sensors, ETS1 and ETS2 are located in a tube holder under insulation, as illustrated
in Figure 7.26. When the combo sensor is removed and reinstalled, it must be placed in a tube holder by applying
thermal grease. Insulating material must completely cover the sensor to ensure the correct temperature is sensed.

Figure 7.26 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Positioning

Wire Tie

Insulation

1.00 in.
ETS Tube Holder (25.4cm)

ETS1 and ETS2

7.25.7 Sensor, CPDS Re-Installation

To replace the Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor, see Figure 7.27:

1. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power source and that ST is in OFF position.

2. Remove the existing sensor. Clean all silicone sealer and dielectric compound from the sensor well. Ensure
well is clean and dry. The top of the compressor, where the sensor seals, must also be clean and dry.

7–39 T-365
 Figure 7.27 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor

SENSOR

SILICONE BEAD

SENSOR WELL

3. Using the syringe supplied with the replacement sensor, squeeze all of the dielectric compound into the sen-
sor well.
4. Place a bead of the silicone sealer supplied with the replacement sensor around the sensor sealing ring.
Insert sensor into the well with the leads parallel to the suction fitting.
5. Reconnect the sensor (see Figure 7.23) and run Pre-trip P5.

7.26 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS)

The vent position sensor (VPS) determines the position of the fresh air vent in near real-time via the Cd55.
The fresh air vent position sensor alarm (AL50) will occur if the sensor reading is not stable for four minutes or if the
sensor is outside of its valid range (shorted or open). This can occur if the vent is loose or the panel is defective. To
confirm a defective panel, assure that the wing nut is secure and then power cycle the unit. If the alarm immedi-
ately reappears as active, the panel should be replaced.
The alarm should immediately go inactive, check the 4-minute stability requirement. If the alarm reoccurs after the
four minutes and the panel was known to have been stable, then the sensor should be replaced.

Upper VPS:
In order to replace the Upper VPS, the panel must be removed and replaced with another upper fresh air panel
equipped with VPS.
Upon installation, a new VPS assembly requires calibration as follows:
1. Rotate the vent to the 0 CMH/ CFM position.
2. Cd45 will automatically display. Press the Enter key and hold for five seconds.
3. After the enter key has been pressed the display will read CAL (for calibration).
4. Press the ALT MODE key and hold for five seconds.

5. After the calibration has been completed, Cd45 will display 0 CMH / CFM.

T-365 7–40
7.27 EAUTOFRESH SERVICE

7.27.1 Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter

Removing the Air Sample Filter Element

The air sample filter element can be accessed in two ways:
• Through the eAutoFresh side evaporator access panel.
• Through the inside of the container by lowering the upper evaporator panel.
1. By hand, unscrew and remove the filter cup from the bottom of the air sample filter assembly.
2. Remove the filter element from the filter assembly.
3. Install the new air sample filter element by reversing the above steps.

7.27.2 Checking eAutoFresh Drive System

Checking the Auto Slide:

To check with an ohmmeter

Disconnect the four pin connector to the stepper motor. With a reliable digital ohmmeter, check the winding
resistance. In normal ambient, the motor should have 72 to 84 ohms measured on the red/green (a-b terminals)
and on the white/black (c-d terminals) leads. If an infinite or zero reading occurs, check connections or replace
the motor. If near normal or normal reading occurs, proceed to the following sections to check out the controller.

To check with a SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester.

The SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00375-00) is a battery operated stepper
drive which will open and close the auto slide, which allows a more thorough check of the motor.

Checking the Slide Motor:

1. Turn unit OFF.
2. Disconnect the four pin connector from the Stepper Drive to the Stepper Motor, (see Figure 7.28).
3. Attach the SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester to the Stepper Motor.

Figure 7.28 Stepper Components

Stepper Drive (SD) Stepper Motor (AF)

4. Set the SMA-12 pulse per second (PPS) to one PPS and press button to open or close the valve. Each
LED should light sequentially until all four are lit. If an LED fails to light, it indicates an open on that leg
caused by a poor connection or an open coil. Repair or replace as required to achieve proper operation.
5. Set the SMA-12 step rate to 200 PPS. Press open or close while watching the slide mechanism for
movement, this is an indication that the motor is working.
6. If the slide moves using the SMA-12, but fails to move when connected in the unit (refer to “Checking the
Drive Module” in the section that follows.)

7–41 T-365
 Checking the Drive Module:
1. Turn unit OFF.
2. Disconnect the four pin connector to the Stepper Motor.
3. With a voltmeter set to read 24 volts AC, attach the positive lead to the drive module outlet pin A (wire
1A) of the four pin connector and the negative lead to the B pin (wire 1B).
4. Turn ON unit, and watch the volt meter. After a short delay, the reading should rise to approximately 12 volts.
5. Repeat for pins C and D (wires 2A and 2B).
6. If only one set of pins reads a voltage, check connections and retest.
7. If the retest reads out the same, the drive module or controller is faulty.
8. If no voltage is present in any step, the output from the controller to the drive module may be faulty.
Check the connections and wires from the controller to the drive module.
9. To replace the drive module, disconnect all connectors, unscrew from mounting, and replace with a NEW
drive module in reverse order.

7.27.3 Checking the Controller

1. Turn the unit OFF.
2. Disconnect the six pin connector to the stepper drive from the controller.
3. With a voltmeter set to read 50 volts DC, attach the positive lead to outlet pin A of the six pin connector, and
the negative lead to pin B or TP-9 of the controller.
4. Turn ON the unit for 40 seconds, and watch the voltmeter. There should be approximately 24 to 32 VDC
shown on pin A.
5. There should be zero volts on pin B.
6. After a short delay, the reading should rise to approximately 24 to 32 VDC on pin E.
7. Pins C and D will have zero to 5 volts transistor logic (TTL) signals present, however, this can only be
checked with the connector assembled as this is an open collector type circuit. Checking the outputs on A, B
and E will verify that the controller is supplying power to the drive module. To be thorough, and if it is desired,
the signals on pins C and D can be checked as follows:
8. Install a jumper assembly (Carrier part number 07-00408-00) to connect the drive module and controller
connectors as shown in Figure 7.29.
9. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to test connector socket C and negative lead to socket B, and run
as before by resetting unit.
10.Repeat for sockets D and B.
Figure 7.29 Jumper Assembly

Controller Drive Module

Connector (EC) Connector (SD)

A
B
C A
D B
E C
D
E
Test
Connector Jumper

There should be approximately five volts DC on sockets “C” and “D” (S1 and S2) when measured as above. If not
the connections or controller is faulty. If any of these pins are not consistent, the connections or the controller is
suspect. Check and replace as required.

T-365 7–42
7.27.4 Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System

To replace the Drive Motor Assembly:

1. Remove the bolts that secure the eAutoFresh Panel (3, Figure 7.30) to the front of the unit. Reach in, cut tie
wrap, and disconnect the motor connector. Bring panel to work area.
2. Remove four screws fastening the grille.
3. Remove six screws fastening the rails, the slide plate and the gasket plate. Set components aside for reas-
sembly.
4. Remove the four screws fastening the motor cup to the panel. Cut sealer on outside and inside of motor cup
assembly. Push out the motor cup assembly from the rear of the panel.
5. Mount the replacement motor cup assembly in the panel using original screws. Torque screws to 0.29 mkg
(25 +/- 1 Inch pounds).
6. Reapply sealer to the inside and the outside of the motor cup assembly.
7. Mount the upper & lower rails, slide plate and gasket plate using original hardware. Apply thread sealant and
torque screws to 0.29 mkg (25 +/- 1 Inch pounds).
8. Mount grille assembly using original hardware. Apply thread sealant and torque screws to 0.29 mkg (25 +/-1
Inch pounds).
9. Reconnect the motor connector.
10.Replace the bolts that secure the eAutoFresh Panel to the front of the unit.
11. Carry out functional test. Refer to Section 5.4.3 step c.

Figure 7.30 Motor Cup Replacement

Connector

Tie Wrap

eAutoFresh Panel

Top Rail Grille

Gasket Plate
Grill Screws
Motor Cup

Slide Plate

Connector

Bottom Rail Rail Screws

Motor Cup Screws

7–43 T-365
7.28 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES
The refrigeration unit is protected by a special paint system against the corrosive atmosphere in which it normally
operates. However, should the paint system be damaged, the base metal can corrode. In order to protect the
refrigeration unit from the highly corrosive sea atmosphere, or if the protective paint system is scratched or dam-
aged, clean the area to bare metal using a wire brush, emery paper or equivalent cleaning method. Immediately
following cleaning, apply paint to the area, and allow to dry. Refer to the Parts List for proper paint selection.

7.29 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION

Figure 7.31 Communications Interface Installation

CB1 Communications

Units that have been factory provisioned for installation of a Communication Interface Module (CIM) have the
required wiring installed. If the unit is not factory provisioned, a provision wiring kit (Carrier Transicold part number
76-00685-00) must be installed. Installation instructions are packaged with the kit.

To Install the Module:

! WARNING
Installation requires wiring to the main unit circuit breaker, CB1. Make sure the power to the
unit is off and power plug disconnected before beginning installation.

1. CB1 is connected to the power system, see wiring schematic. Ensure that the unit power is off AND that the
unit power plug is disconnected.

2. Open control box, (see Figure 7.31) and remove low voltage shield. Open high voltage shield.

3. If using factory provisioned wiring, remove the circuit breaker panel, with circuit breaker, from the control
box. Locate, wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and CB23/CIA7 that have been tied back in the wire harness.
Remove the protective heat shrink from the ends of the wires.

4. Refit the circuit breaker panel.

5. Fit the new CIM into the unit.

6. Attach three wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and CB23/CIA7 to the CIM at connection CIA.

7. Locate connectors CIA and CIB, remove plugs if required, and attach to the module.

8. Replace the low voltage shield.

T-365 7–44
 Table 7–4 R-134a Temperature - Pressure Chart
Temp Vacuum Temp Pressure
F C “/hg cm/hg kg/cm2 bar F C “/hg cm/hg kg/cm2 bar
-40 -40 14.6 49.4 37.08 0.49 28 -2 24.5 168.9 1.72 1.69
-35 -37 12.3 41.6 31.25 0.42 30 -1 26.1 180.0 1.84 1.80
-30 -34 9.7 32.8 24.64 0.33 32 0 27.8 191.7 1.95 1.92
-25 -32 6.7 22.7 17.00 0.23 34 1 29.6 204.1 2.08 2.04
-20 -29 3.5 11.9 8.89 0.12 36 2 31.3 215.8 2.20 2.16
-18 -28 2.1 7.1 5.33 0.07 38 3 33.2 228.9 2.33 2.29
-16 -27 0.6 2.0 1.52 0.02 40 4 35.1 242.0 2.47 2.42
Temp Pressure 45 7 40.1 276.5 2.82 2.76
F C “/hg cm/hg kg/cm2 bar 50 10 45.5 313.7 3.20 3.14

-14 -26 0.4 1.1 0.03 0.03 55 13 51.2 353.0 3.60 3.53

-12 -24 1.2 8.3 0.08 0.08 60 16 57.4 395.8 4.04 3.96
-10 -23 2.0 13.8 0.14 0.14 65 18 64.1 441.0 4.51 4.42
-8 -22 2.9 20.0 0.20 0.20 70 21 71.1 490.2 5.00 4.90
-6 -21 3.7 25.5 0.26 0.26 75 24 78.7 542.6 5.53 5.43
-4 -20 4.6 31.7 0.32 0.32 80 27 86.7 597.8 6.10 5.98
-2 -19 5.6 36.6 0.39 0.39 85 29 95.3 657.1 6.70 6.57
0 -18 6.5 44.8 0.46 0.45 90 32 104.3 719.1 7.33 7.19
2 -17 7.6 52.4 0.53 0.52 95 35 114.0 786.0 8.01 7.86
4 -16 8.6 59.3 0.60 0.59 100 38 124.2 856.4 8.73 8.56
6 -14 9.7 66.9 0.68 0.67 105 41 135.0 930.8 9.49 9.31
8 -13 10.8 74.5 0.76 0.74 110 43 146.4 1009 10.29 10.09
10 -12 12.0 82.7 0.84 0.83 115 46 158.4 1092 11.14 10.92
12 -11 13.2 91.0 0.93 0.91 120 49 171.2 1180 12.04 11.80
14 -10 14.5 100.0 1.02 1.00 125 52 184.6 1273 12.98 12.73
16 -9 15.8 108.9 1.11 1.09 130 54 198.7 1370 13.97 13.70
18 -8 17.1 117.9 1.20 1.18 135 57 213.6 1473 15.02 14.73
20 -7 18.5 127.6 1.30 1.28 140 60 229.2 1580 16.11 15.80
22 -6 19.9 137.2 1.40 1.37 145 63 245.6 1693 17.27 16.93
24 -4 21.4 147.6 1.50 1.48 150 66 262.9 1813 18.48 18.13
26 -3 22.9 157.9 1.61 1.58 155 68 281.1 1938 19.76 19.37

7–45 T-365
 Table 7–5 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel)
BOLT DIA. THREADS in-lb ft-lb N-m
Free Spinning
#4 40 5.2 0.4 0.6
#6 32 9.6 0.8 1.1
#8 32 20 1.7 2.3
#10 24 23 1.9 2.6
1/4 20 75 6.3 8.5
5/16 18 132 11 14.9
3/8 16 240 20 27.1
7/16 14 372 31 42
1/2 13 516 43 58.3
9/16 12 684 57 77.3
5/8 11 1104 92 124.7
3/4 10 1488 124 168.1
Non Free Spinning (Locknuts etc.)
1/4 20 82.5 6.9 9.3
5/16 18 145.2 12.1 16.4
3/8 16 264 22.0 29.8
7/16 14 409.2 34.1 46.2
1/2 13 567.6 47.3 64.1
9/16 12 752.4 62.7 85
5/8 11 1214.4 101.2 137.2
3/4 10 1636.8 136.4 184.9

T-365 7–46
 SECTION 8
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS
8.1 INTRODUCTION
This section contains the Electrical Schematics and Wiring Diagrams.

Figure 8.1 Legend

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

AIM AUTOFRESH INTERFACE MODULE (Dï24) ICF INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR FRONT (Tï23)
AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (Cï23) ICR INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR REAR (Tï24)
C CONTROLLER (Lï21) IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (Eï14, Fï11, Gï14)
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER ï 460 VOLT (Jï1) IRL IN RANGE LIGHT (OPTION) (Kï15)
CB2 OPTIONAL CIRCUIT BREAKER ï DVM (OPTION) LC CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (LOW SPEED) (K15)
(Dï1) TERMINAL BLOCK WHEN CB2 NOT PRESENT
OS O2 SENSOR (H24)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (Nï8, Lï12)
OS O2 SENSOR AMPLIFIER (K24)
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (Lï10, Pï1)
PA UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (Kï8, Lï8, Nï1)
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (OPTION)
(Aï4) PB UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (Kï8, Lï8, Nï3)
CL COOL LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï14) PR USDA PROBE RECEPTACLE (Mï24, Nï24, Pï24)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (Eï11, Gï12, Tï10) PTC1 PTC FOR VENT POSITIONING SENSOR (UPPER)
(Nï17)
COS CO2 SENSOR (Fï24)
RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE (OPTION)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (Tï4) (Kï7, Lï7, Kï14, Lï14, Kï16, Lï16)
CPDS DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Aï23) RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (Cï23)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (Mï2) RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Bï23)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM LEFT (Rï8) SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Hï23)
DHBR DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM RIGHT (Tï7) SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (Lï23)
DHML DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE LEFT (Rï7) SS SENSOR SWITCH MODULE (P24)
DHMR DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE RIGHT (Tï7) ST START ï STOP SWITCH (Kï5)
DHTL DEFROST HEATER ï TOP LEFT (Rï7) STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Aï23)
DHTR DEFROST HEATER ï TOP RIGHT (Tï8) TC CONTROLLER RELAYïCOOLING (Jï9)
DL DEFROST LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï7) TCC TRANSFRESH COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR
(OPTION) (Dï6)
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Kï23)
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Cï23) TCP CONTROLLER RELAY ï PHASE SEQUENCING
(Jï7, Jï8)
DLV DIGITAL LOADER VALVE (Fï24)
TD CONTROLLER RELAY (DUV) (J12)
DUV DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (Lï13)
TE CONTROLLER RELAY ï HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (OPTIONAL) (Dï1) FANS (Jï15)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (OPTIONAL) (Fï3)
TH CONTROLLER RELAY ï HEATING (Jï16)
EEV EVAPORATOR EXPANSION VALVE (Rï16)
TF CONTROLLER RELAY ï DEFROST (Eï7)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTORïHIGH SPEED TG CONTROLLER RELAY ï (CONDENSER FAN SPEED)
(Mï15, Lï14) (H11)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (Tï13, Tï15, Eï15, Fï15, TI INïRANGE RELAY (Jï15)
Gï15)
EPT EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Hï23) TL CONTROLLER RELAY ï COOL LIGHT (Jï14)
TN CONTROLLER RELAY ï CONDENSER FAN (Dï10)
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTORïLOW SPEED
(Pï10, Lï14) TP TEST POINT (Hï9, Fï10, Hï12, Gï13, Hï13,
Gï15, Lï17)
ETS EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (SUCTION)
(Dï23) TR TRANSFORMER (Mï3)
ESV ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE (Jï10) TRANS AUTO TRANSFORMER 230/460 (OPTION) (Dï3)
F FUSE (Cï7, Dï7, Fï21, Gï21) TRC TRANSFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (Eï7)
FS CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (HIGH SPEED TS CONTROLLER RELAY ï ECONOMIZER SOLENOID
SHORTING) (M2) VALVE (Eï10)
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS TV CONTROLLER RELAY ï LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
FANS (Jï14)
HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (Gï9)
VPS VENT POSITION SENSOR (UPPER) (Nï17)
HR HEATER CONTACTOR (Nï7, Lï15)
WCR WETTING CURRENT RESISTOR (OPTION) (Jï13)
HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (OPTIONAL) (Fï23)
WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (OPTION) (Eï13)
HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (Eï15)

8–1 T-365
 Figure 8.2 Unit Wiring Diagram

Based on Drawing 62ï11755

T-365 8–2
Figure 8.3 Wiring Diagram

Based on Drawing 62ï11755

8–3 T-365
 Figure 8.4 Wiring Diagram

Based on Drawing 62ï11755

T-365 8–4
 China RoHS per SJ/T 11364-2014

ӝ૷ѣᴿᇩ⢟䍞Ⲻ੃〦਀੡䠅
ᴿᇩ⢟䍞
䫻 ⊔ 䭿 ‫ޣ‬ԭ䬢 ཐ⓪㚊㤥 ཐ⓪ӂ㤥䟐
䜞Ԭ੃〦 (Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr (VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
䠇ኔᶵ䜞Ԭ O O O O O O
ງᯏ䜞Ԭ O O O O O O
ⴎ㇗㓺Ԭ X O O O O O
ࣖ✣䜞Ԭ O O O O O O
傢䗴θু㕟ᵰф伄᡽㓺Ԭ O O O O O O
⑟ᓜ᧝࡬ᗤ༺⨼ಞ㌱㔕 X O O O O O
ᯣ䐥ಞф᧛䀜ಞ O O O O O O
਎ুಞ O O O O O O
Ֆ᝕ಞ X O O O O O
䙐䇥㓺Ԭ O O O O O O
䰶㓺Ԭ X O O O O O
⭫㔼㓵/⭫Ⓠ O O O O O O
⭫⊖ O O X O O O
ḽㆴф㔓㕎ᶆᯏ O O O O O O
⧱⪹䜞Ԭ X O O O O O
ᵢ㺞Ṳ‫ ᦤד‬SJ/T 11364 Ⲻ㿺ᇐ㕌࡬Ⱦ
Oφ㺞⽰䈛ᴿᇩ⢟䍞൞䈛䜞Ԭᡶᴿൽ䍞ᶆᯏѣⲺ੡䠅ൽ൞ GB/T 26572 㿺ᇐⲺ䲆䠅㾷≸ԛсȾ
Xφ㺞⽰䈛ᴿᇩ⢟䍞㠩ቇ൞䈛䜞ԬⲺḆжൽ䍞ᶆᯏѣⲺ੡䠅䎻࠰ GB/T 26572 㿺ᇐⲺ䲆䠅㾷≸Ⱦ
62-66122-00, Rev A
 INDEX

Numerics Control Box 2–1

Control Box Section 3–5
230 Volt Cable 2–3
Controller 2–3, 4–3, 7–29
460 Volt Cable 2–3
Controller Alarm Indications 4–39
Controller Alarms 4–15
A Controller Configuration Variables 4–24
Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge) 7–7 Controller Function Codes 4–26
Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge) 7–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes 4–53
Adjust Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2 Controller Sequence and Modes of Operation 4–5
Air-Cooled Condenser Section 3–4 Controller Software 4–4
Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10) 4–21 Controller Troubleshooting 7–29
Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–18
Autotransformer 2–2, 7–28 D
DataCORDER 4–16
B DataCORDER Alarms 4–23
Back Panels 2–3 DataCORDER Communications 4–22
Battery 2–2 DataCORDER Description 4–16
DataCORDER Power Up 4–21
C DataCORDER Software 4–18
Defrost 4–12
Cable Restraint 2–3
Defrost Operation 4–12
Check Controller Function Codes 5–7
Defrost Related Parameters 4–13
Checking eAutoFresh Drive System 7–41
Dehumidification 2–2
Checking High Pressure Switch 7–12
Digital Loader Valve 7–24
Checking the Controller 7–42
Digital Unloader Valve 7–26
Checking the Refrigerant Charge 7–7
Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–18
Communications Interface Module 2–2, 3–5
Display Module 4–3
Communications Interface Module Installation 7–44
Complete Inspection 5–7
Compressor 2–1, 7–8
E
Compressor High Temperature Protection 4–14 eAutoFresh 2–3
Compressor Low Pressure Protection 4–14 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation 5–5
Compressor Section 3–3 eAutoFresh Operation 5–4
Condenser Coil 2–1, 7–13 eAutoFresh Pre−Trip Inspection 5–4
Condenser Coil Cleaning 7–13 eAutoFresh Service 7–41
Condenser Coil Installation 7–14 eAutoFresh Start-Up Procedure 5–4
Condenser Coil Preparation 7–14 Economized Operation 3–9
Condenser Coil Removal 7–13 Economizer Expansion Valve 7–22
Condenser Fan and Fan Motor 7–15 Economizer Solenoid Valve 7–21
Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace 7–15 Electrical System Data 3–7
Condenser Fan Operation 2–1 Electronic Expansion Valve 7–20
Condenser Fan Override 4–15 Evacuation and dehydration 7–5
Condenser Grille 2–3 Evacuation and Dehydration, Complete System 7–6
Configuration Identification 2–1 Evacuation and Dehydration, General 7–5
Configuration Software (CnF Variables) 4–4 Evacuation and Dehydration, Partial System 7–6
Connect Power 5–1 Evacuation and Dehydration, Preparation 7–5
Connect Remote Monitoring Receptacle 5–6 Evaporator 2–1
Connection To 190/230 VAC Power 5–1 Evaporator Coil & Heater Assembly 7–16
Connection To 380/460 VAC Power 5–1 Evaporator Coil Replacement 7–16

Index-1 T-365
Evaporator Fan and Motor Assembly 7–17 M
Evaporator Fan Operation 2–1, 4–14
Maintenance of Painted Surfaces 7–44
Evaporator Heater Replacement 7–17
Maintenance Precautions 1–1
Evaporator Section 3–2
Manifold Gauge Set 7–1
Evaporator Section Cleaning 7–19

F O
Operating Precautions 1–1
Failure Action 4–14
Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) 4–4
Feature Descriptions 2–1
Option Descriptions 2–2
Filter Drier 7–16
First Aid 1–1
Fresh Air Makeup Vent 3–1
P
Frozen “Heat” Mode 4–10 Perishable Dehumidification 4–6
Frozen Economy Mode 4–11 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode 4–7
Frozen Idle Mode 4–10 Perishable Economy 4–7
Frozen Mode - Temperature Control 4–9 Perishable Heating 4–6
Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation 4–11 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation 4–5
Frozen Steady State 4–10 Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regulation 4–15
Perishable Mode - Trim Heat 4–9
G Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation 4–8
Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation 4–9
General Description 3–1
Perishable Mode Temperature Control 4–5
General Safety Notices 1–1
Perishable Pulldown 4–6
Generator Protection 4–14
Perishable Steady State 4–5
Gutters 2–2
Physical Inspection 5–7
Plate Set 2–2
H
Pressure Readout 2–1
Handles 2–2 Pre-Trip Data Recording 4–22
Handling Modules 7–29 Pre-Trip Diagnosis 5–7
High Pressure Switch 7–12 Pre-Trip Diagnostics 4–16
Probe Diagnostics 5–9
I Programming Procedure for Software Versions 5354
and Greater 7–31
Inspection (Before Loading) 5–1
Protection Modes of Operation 4–14
Installing the Digital Loader Valve 7–25
Pump Down the Unit 7–3
Interrogator 2–2
Introduction 2–1
Introduction to Electrical Schematics and Wiring Dia-
Q
grams 8–1 Quest - CCPC 4–15
ISO Trip Header 4–24 Quest − CCPC 2–2

K R
Key Pad 4–2 Refrigerant Charge 7–7
Refrigerant Leak Checking 7–4
L Refrigeration Circuit 3–9
Labels 2–3 Refrigeration System Data 3–6
Logging Interval (dCF03) 4–19 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section 3–1
Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) 2–3 Remote Monitoring 2–2
Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–3 Removal and Replacement of Compressor 7–8
Removing and Installing a Controller 7–32
Replacing a Battery 7–33

T-365 Index-2
Replacing a Sensor 7–37 Starting and Stopping Instructions 5–6
Replacing Electronic Expansion Valve and Strainer 7– Starting the Unit 5–7
20 Start-Up Inspection 5–7
Replacing High Pressure Switch 7–12 Stopping the Unit 5–7
Replacing the Digital Loader Valve 7–24
Replacing the Digital Unloader Valve 7–26 T
Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–18
Temperature Control Microprocessor System 4–1
Temperature Readout 2–1
S
Temperature Sensor Service 7–33
Safety and Protective Devices 3–8 Thermistor Format (dCF04) 4–19
Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) 4–21 Thermometer Port 2–2
Section Layout 7–1 Troubleshooting the P6-7 (DLV/DUV) 7–23
Sensor Checkout Procedure 7–34
Sensor Configuration (dCF02) 4–18 U
Sensor DTS Re-Installation 7–39
Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) 2–3
Sensor, CPDS Re-Installation 7–39
Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2
Sensors ETS1 and ETS2 Re-Installation 7–39
USDA 2–2
Sensors RRS and RTS Re-Installation 7–39
USDA Cold Treatment 4–22
Sensors STS and SRS Re-Installation 7–38
USDA Cold Treatment Procedure 4–23
Service Connections 7–2
Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter 7–41
Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System 7–43
V
Specific Hazard Statements 1–1 Vent Position Sensor 5–4
Standard Operation 3–9 Vent Position Sensor (VPS) 7–40
Start Temperature Recorder DataCORDER 5–7
Start Up - Compressor Bump Start 4–5 X
Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence 4–5
XtendFRESH 2–3

Index-3 T-365
 Carrier Transicold Division,
Carrier Corporation
A part of UTC Building & Industrial Systems, a business unit of United P.O. Box 4805
Technologies Corporation. Stock symbol UTX. Syracuse, NY 13221 USA

Original Instructions www.carrier.transicold.com